Add Dutch and Spanish language info
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
1fa28578
GM
43\f
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
8416e94a
DL
46** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
47symbol, not double-quoted.
48
2a64f8c2 49** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
50version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
51rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
52lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 53
22adbe54
DL
54+++
55** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
56system for keyboard input.
57
eb1b0c74
GM
58+++
59** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
60to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
61
7495f7ca
EZ
62+++
63** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
64as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
65with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
66example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
67middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
68
1636ca09 69+++
a01cfb77
GM
70** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
71changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
72buffer by default.
73
c607d53d 74** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 75trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
76this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
77
4104194e
GM
78** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
79be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
80
c6f01e00
MB
81** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
82To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
83`auto-compression-mode' command.
84
4c724b32
DL
85** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
86`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
87
b856f39c 88+++
068127d6
GM
89** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
90operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
91
fd06c7da
MB
92** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
93(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
94remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
95may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
96
8ac08dea 97+++
62c273d7
DL
98** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
99is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
100
101+++
102** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
103mode `iswitchb-mode'.
104
8ac08dea 105+++
f393cf90
DL
106** Gnus changes.
107
108The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
109four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
110internationalization and mail-fetching.
111
112*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
113many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
114
115If you used procmail like in
116
117(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
118(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
119(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
120(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
121
327652be 122this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
123
124(setq mail-sources
125 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
126 :suffix ".in")))
127
128More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
129Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
130
131*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
132Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
133Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
134longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
135
657706fa
DL
136The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
137use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
138installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 139
60dd7e0e 140*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
141parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
142are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
143now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
144
145*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
146called to position point.
147
148*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
149summary buffers and NOV files.
150
151*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
152of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
153
154*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
155subtly different manner.
156
157*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
158and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
159ever-changing layouts.
160
161*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
162
72190b84 163*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
164
165** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1668859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
167more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
168empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
169window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
170on.
171
ba9eeda1
GM
172** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
173set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
174file that is already visited under a different name.
175
42ac0ae5
GM
176** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
177nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
178
179** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
180recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
181signaled.
182
ba9eeda1 183** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
184support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
185use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
186buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
187M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
188new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
189
b941a14b 190+++
ba9eeda1 191** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 192and displays information about that.
b941a14b 193
ba9eeda1 194** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
195file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
196
5e56e175
GM
197** Polish, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
198have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `de-refcard.tex' and
199`fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
d7b38c05 200
657706fa
DL
201** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
202
d7b38c05 203** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5e56e175
GM
204`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
205`fr-drdref.tex'.
d7b38c05 206
25ad1371
GM
207** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
208expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
209
210This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
211determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
212mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
213interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
214regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
215associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
216
b856f39c 217+++
f0298744
DL
218** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
219displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
220menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
221menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
222
9a8d84ca
DL
223** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
224a version-dependent component.
225
5f368d29
GM
226** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
227let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
228
229On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
230according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
231key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
232option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
233delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
234
235If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
236a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
237Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
238`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
239the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
240have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
241
242Programmatically, you can call function
243delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
244key.
d76c03ea 245
3b4fa1b2
DL
246** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
247using that menu.
248
40e857ea 249** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 250suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 251
beb2eb00 252+++
c08398de
DL
253** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
254buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
255contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
256by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
257insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
258the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
259Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
260
db7a3ede 261+++
3d6cd763
GM
262** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
263coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
264escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
265such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
266recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 267always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 268read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
269(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
270RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 271
0b8a3a6d
DL
272** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
273environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
274
424d8b44 275+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
276** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
277point in a pop-up window.
278
6d35b49f 279+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
280** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
281displays all characters in that character set.
282
283** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
284coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
285
a4067978 286+++
5cb6a58e 287** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 288on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
289defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
290commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 291
424d8b44 292+++
a1b8d58b
GM
293** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
294
6e417ca5
DL
295** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
296been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
297
424d8b44 298+++
5898e075
DL
299** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
300`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
301indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
302indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
303
424d8b44 304+++
abfcc168
GM
305** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
306sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 307(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
308You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
309
424d8b44 310+++
cc181e95
GM
311** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
312on the display using several methods
313
424d8b44 314+++
cc181e95
GM
315- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
316a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
317be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
318
424d8b44 319+++
cc181e95 320- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 321equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 322
da4496b6 323- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
324
325- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
326the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
327
424d8b44 328+++
3b4fa1b2 329** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 330an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 331command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 332does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 333
424d8b44 334+++
176256a1 335** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
336`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
337typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 338
dd0add8e
DL
339** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
340characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
341
bf3ba9ac 342+++
699238d9
GM
343** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
344compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
345this behavior.
346
347The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
348compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
349Emacs dump core.
350
424d8b44 351+++
699238d9 352** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 353
7233c5bd
GM
354*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
355whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
356is useful for debugging X problems.
357
358Example:
359
699238d9 360 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 361
100b3cbb
GM
362*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
363visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
364the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
365and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
366visual class names are
367
368 TrueColor
369 PseudoColor
370 DirectColor
371 StaticColor
372 GrayScale
373 StaticGray
374
375Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
376`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
377meaning.
378
379The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
380supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
381`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
382visual.
383
384Example:
385
699238d9 386 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
387
388*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
389specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
390default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
391resource values are `true' or `on'.
392
393Example:
394
699238d9 395 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 396
0d0c76b8
EZ
397** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
398more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
399now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
400
e921a911 401+++
42088c12 402** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 403display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
404shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
405be customized.
c60ea02e 406
424d8b44 407+++
31047e0d
DL
408** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
409
424d8b44 410+++
b02786f9
GM
411** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
412all frames except the selected one.
413
3261c1d8
DL
414** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
415to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
416
ffe36136 417** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
418the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
419MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
420displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
421
0292b49f 422+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
423** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
424MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 425
559cee90
DL
426** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
427read mail from the menu etc.
428
480b5773 429+++
271b4185
GM
430** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
431a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
432
0daee095
GM
433** Changes in Texinfo mode.
434
a5e350c9 435*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
436macros
437
438 Key binding Macro
439 -------------------------
440 C-c C-c C-s @strong
441 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 442 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 443 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 444 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
445 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
446 M-RET @item
447
448*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 449
559cee90
DL
450** Changes in Outline mode.
451
452There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
453`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
454the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
455
327652be 456** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 457
c0a8c108
EZ
458+++
459*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
460with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
461are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
462Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
463buffers to kill, as before.
464
465Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 466i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
467this way.
468
956777b3
GM
469** Changes to Show Paren mode.
470
471*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
472The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
473use. Default is 1000.
474
f6989277 475+++
404fa7d6
DL
476** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
477groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
478
424d8b44
DL
479+++
480** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
481M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
482M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
483buffers.
8964fec7 484
424d8b44 485+++
39783d73
WP
486** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
487under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
488.emacs file.
489
490The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
491determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
492
d35fce81
GM
493** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
494abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
495`directory-abbrev-alist'.
496
a933dad1
DL
497** Faces and frame parameters.
498
499There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
500Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
501`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
502`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
503sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
504for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
505parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
506
507Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
508`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 509`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
510`default' face and vice versa.
511
d80061fa 512+++
f77a4a8a
GM
513** New face `menu'.
514
515The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
516Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
517attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
518
424d8b44 519+++
a933dad1
DL
520** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
521
522The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
523colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
524correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
525the screen gamma of a frame's display.
526
527PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
528in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
529color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
530
531The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
532`ScreenGamma'.
533
534** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
535
536The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
537Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
538oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
539of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
540the text.
541
542** Emacs has a new face implementation.
543
544The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
545font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
546height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
547These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
548specify a font.
549
550Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
551These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
552under Lisp changes, below.
553
7f90b826 554** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
a933dad1 555
424d8b44
DL
556+++
557** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
558of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
559otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
560
561** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
562truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
563foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
564customizing face `fringe'.
565
8d0f00fd
MB
566** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
567You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
568
569The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
570versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
571and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
572
573** LessTif support.
574
424d8b44
DL
575Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
576You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
577
578** Toolkit scroll bars.
579
580Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
581LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
582configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
583bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
584bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
585Emacs.
586
587When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
588Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
589Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
590Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
591define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
592`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
593
594Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
595a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
596directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
597different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
598system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
599add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
600
601The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
602`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
603This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
604image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
605Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
606
607** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
608
609When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
610widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
611Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
612
424d8b44 613+++
a933dad1
DL
614** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
615
616When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
617whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
618defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
619highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
620displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
621whitespace.
622
6e612d4d 623+++
a933dad1
DL
624** Busy-cursor.
625
626Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
627display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
628
424d8b44 629+++
a933dad1
DL
630** Blinking cursor
631
632M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
633terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
634and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
635the group `cursor'.
636
8ac08dea 637+++
a933dad1
DL
638** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
639
640This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
641generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
642See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
643details.
644
645Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
646have to do anything to activate it.
647
648** Tabs and variable-width text.
649
650Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
651defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
652independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
653Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
654
655** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
656
424d8b44 657+++
a933dad1
DL
658*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
659
660 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
661
79dd1637
RS
662The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
663LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 664
79dd1637
RS
665*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
666LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 667
34d90e29 668+++
a933dad1
DL
669** Hscrolling in C code.
670
cc181e95
GM
671Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
672`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
673customized.
a933dad1 674
03ff8aab
GM
675If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
676scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
677for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
678the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
679to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
680
8ac08dea 681+++
a933dad1
DL
682** Tool bar support.
683
684Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
685of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
686changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
687displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
688if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
689icons will be used.
690
691To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
692for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
693also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 694
424d8b44 695+++
a933dad1
DL
696** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
697
698Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
699mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
700line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
701about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
702in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
703
704Currently, the following actions have been defined:
705
706- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
707buffers.
708
709- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
710M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
711
712- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
713
424d8b44
DL
714- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
715`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
716
717- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
718
719** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
720
721When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 722from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
723non-nil.
724
725** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
726
727Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
728Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
729the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
730italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
731Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
732attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
733on terminals.
a933dad1 734
54a9404d
EZ
735The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
736supported on character terminals.
737
a933dad1
DL
738** Sound support
739
2f516940 740Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 741driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 742supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 743
424d8b44 744+++
a933dad1
DL
745** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
746the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
747forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
748value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
749users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
750even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
751
752The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
753
0e18b431 754+++
a933dad1
DL
755** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
756
757As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
758drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
759`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
760
fdd8bb68 761+++
a933dad1
DL
762** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
763bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
764
765This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
766`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
767variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
768
c5d00c64 769+++
a933dad1
DL
770** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
771
772When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 773value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 774number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 775fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
776
777When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
778value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
779number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 780fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
781
782** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
783notably at the end of lines.
784
785All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
786spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
787
424d8b44 788+++
eee54b0e
DL
789There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
790
a933dad1
DL
791** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
792query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
793after each match to get the replacement text.
794
00782214 795+++
d5483ab1
GM
796** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
797you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 798
424d8b44 799** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
800you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
801lisp-complete-symbol.
802
7af69644 803+++
a933dad1
DL
804** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
805
163ea954 806If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
807longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
808is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
809minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
810
811- User option: max-mini-window-height
812
813Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
814fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 815specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
816
817Default is 0.25.
818
a299a6f0
GM
819- User option: resize-mini-windows
820
821How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 822resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
823grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
824again.
825
826Default is `grow-only'.
827
2f72fd2f
GM
828** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
829
0d43b60d
GM
830** Changes to hideshow.el
831
832Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
833selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
834conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
835
836*** Generalized block selection and traversal
837
838A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
839(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
840which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
841`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
842point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
843(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
844
845If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
846i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
847backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
848the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
849
850*** Isearch support for updating mode line
851
852During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
853blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
854line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
855portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
856is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
857
858To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
859something like this in your .emacs.
860
861 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
862 (lambda ()
863 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
864
327652be
TTN
865*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
866
867Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
868header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
869`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
870moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
871block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
872behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
873useful.
874
875You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
876function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
877of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
878code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
879appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
880
881(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
882 (hs-hide-level 1)
883 (forward-sexp 1))
884(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
885
886The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
887emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
888only for code blocks.
889
890*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
891
892Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
893parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
894display for implementation.
895
896*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
897
898The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
899LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
900which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
901new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
902
903 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
904 hs-show-block C-c C-s
905 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
906 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
907 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
908 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
909 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
910
911These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
912
559cee90
DL
913** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
914
424d8b44 915+++
1b24b888
GM
916*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
917an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
918log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
919
424d8b44 920+++
1b24b888
GM
921**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
922current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
923
924+++
1b24b888
GM
925*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
926in a log file.
eb2aac9d 927
502004be 928+++
1b24b888
GM
929*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
930entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 931
502004be 932+++
1b24b888 933*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
934version number is performed based on regular expressions from
935`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
936Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 937
2c63c979 938*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 939
79c78e77
GM
940** Changes to cmuscheme
941
942*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
943`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
944
3476b54a
GM
945** Changes in Font Lock
946
947*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 948font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 949
2c63c979
SM
950*** multiline patterns are now supported.
951
a5e350c9
SM
952*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
953the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 954
601e0081
SM
955*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
956Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
957
b3b98592
GM
958** Comint (subshell) changes
959
988cded7
MB
960These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
961include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
962
963*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
964to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
965parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
966user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
967this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
968respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
969feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
970`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
971
972*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
973and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
974
988cded7 975*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
976buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
977buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
978
979The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
980M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
981the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
982
988cded7
MB
983*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
984and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
985see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 986
988cded7 987*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
988saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
989argument, it appends to the file.
990
988cded7 991*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
992(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
993compatibility.
994
0e40b809
EL
995*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
996ring (history).
d648cc45 997
fe5d5d8c 998*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
999identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1000strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1001
e26cec67
GM
1002** Changes to Rmail mode
1003
b97cd2cc 1004*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
1005set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
1006receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1007recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1008`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1009as correspondent.
1010
1011Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1012mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1013regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1014
3b55acc9
GM
1015*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1016to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1017Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1018with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1019for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1020
6a1950ec
GM
1021*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1022like `j'.
1023
5bb6f079
RS
1024*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1025specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1026digest message.
e26cec67 1027
993d8b7d
DL
1028*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1029in which folder to put messages automatically.
1030
400a1ed0
GM
1031** Changes to TeX mode
1032
a5e350c9 1033*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1034`latex-mode'.
1035
a5e350c9
SM
1036*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1037
1038*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1039
1040*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1041
a933dad1
DL
1042** Changes to RefTeX mode
1043
1044*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1045 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1046 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1047 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1048 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1049 can be edited from that buffer.
1050
1051*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1052 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1053 `A' to use all marked entries).
1054
1055*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1056 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1057
1058*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1059 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1060 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1061 been cited.
1062
38de9631
GM
1063** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1064The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1065semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1066in column 1 are always made leaves.
1067
a933dad1
DL
1068** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1069has the following new features:
1070
1071*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1072may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1073to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1074time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1075
1076*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1077feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1078file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1079compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1080pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1081defaults to 1.
1082
5d94f558 1083** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1084file names.
1085
424d8b44 1086+++
a933dad1
DL
1087** Tooltips.
1088
1089Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1090mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1091turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1092
1093Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1094variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1095the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1096tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1097
424d8b44 1098+++
a933dad1
DL
1099** Customize changes
1100
1101*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1102`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1103cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1104
1105*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1106Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1107default).
1108
0ae51efb
GM
1109*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1110between custom options. Example:
1111
1112 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1113 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1114 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1115 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1116 :group 'mule
1117 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1118 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1119
1120This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1121current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1122first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1123
a933dad1
DL
1124** New features in evaluation commands
1125
5e03eb84 1126*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1127modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1128print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1129customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1130eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1131
5e03eb84
GM
1132*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1133code when called with a prefix argument.
1134
ead53494
GM
1135** Ispell changes
1136
37d8a691 1137+++
bbe15990
EZ
1138*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1139transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1140spell-checks the current buffer.
1141
37d8a691 1142+++
385ff9e3
GM
1143*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1144added.
1145
1146*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1147correction is made and re-checked.
1148
74ec6045 1149*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1150
1151*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1152cases.
1153
1154*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1155on syntax errors.
1156
1157*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1158end of the buffer.
1159
a933dad1
DL
1160** Dired changes
1161
1162*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1163command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1164is, delete only empty directories.
1165
1166*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1167command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1168copy directories recursively.
1169
f6737cde
GM
1170*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1171in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1172the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1173
2f72fd2f
GM
1174*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1175replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1176directory.
1177
7381ae05
MB
1178*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1179a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1180This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1181will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1182accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1183
e024b101
GM
1184*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1185from ls switches.
1186
60b392a7
MB
1187*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1188of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1189which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1190source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1191
a933dad1
DL
1192** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1193use the -f option when sending mail.
1194
b1c609b1
GM
1195** CC mode changes.
1196
1197Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1198current user setups (although it's believed that these
1199incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1200However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1201back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1202compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1203release.
1204
7972fcfc
GM
1205*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1206This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1207of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1208non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1209want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1210have to bother.
1211
1212Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1213situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1214and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1215If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1216the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1217by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1218
b1c609b1
GM
1219*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1220When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1221variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1222take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1223is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1224settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1225possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1226Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1227
1228By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1229special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1230the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1231of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1232above.
1233
1234Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1235when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1236function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1237call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1238then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1239values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1240only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1241function documentation for more info.
1242
1243The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1244especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1245with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1246intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1247such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1248is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1249configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1250global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1251
1252(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1253
1254**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1255This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1256
1257This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1258variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1259completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1260the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1261empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1262style system.
1263
1264**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1265In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1266c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1267as far as possible.
1268
1269*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1270CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1271surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1272chapter about this in the manual.
1273
1274**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1275The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1276recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1277primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1278adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1279
1280**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1281This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1282c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1283
1284**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1285This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1286
1287It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1288Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1289A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1290inside CC Mode.
1291
1292Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1293causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1294the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1295available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1296cc-mode/).
1297
1298**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1299The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1300specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1301literals.
1302
1303**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1304It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1305prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1306you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1307this function.
1308
1309*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1310It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1311to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1312struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1313Thanks to Eric Eide.
1314
1315*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1316It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1317opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1318
1319**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1320
1321*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1322See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1323better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1324and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1325
1326*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1327previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1328the column specified by comment-column.
1329
1330*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1331In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1332is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1333prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1334contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1335don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1336
1337*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1338instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1339arguments.
1340
1341*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1342
1343*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1344c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1345c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1346variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1347Provan).
1348
1349*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1350
c407c570
GM
1351** Makefile mode changes
1352
1353*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1354
5d94f558 1355*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1356Fontlock mode is active.
1357
87be76f6
GM
1358** Isearch changes
1359
3353ef5a
GM
1360*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1361so that searches can be resumed.
1362
1363*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1364respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1365that started the search.
1366
87be76f6 1367*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1368selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1369
c8a8458a 1370+++
87be76f6
GM
1371*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1372
d35fce81 1373Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1374`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1375search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1376before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1377highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1378`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1379
1380The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1381will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1382Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1383using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1384usual snappy response.
1385
1386If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1387matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1388set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1389isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1390
21bc6203 1391+++
35384f06
GM
1392** Changes in sort.el
1393
1394The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1395as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1396new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1397numeric base.
87be76f6 1398
d7b511c4
GM
1399** Changes to Ange-ftp
1400
424d8b44 1401+++
d7b511c4 1402*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1403names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1404sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1405
d7b511c4
GM
1406*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1407ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1408
9d453139
SS
1409*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1410output ^M at the end of lines.
1411
4b9347b3
GM
1412** Shell script mode changes.
1413
1414Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1415derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1416sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1417
79214ddf
FP
1418** Etags changes.
1419
1420*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1421
aca0be23 1422*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1423possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1424{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1425This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1426a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1427
79214ddf
FP
1428*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1429declarations when given the --declarations option.
1430
1431*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1432"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1433
1434*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1435types.
1436
de370c4c 1437*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1438
1439*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1440
1441*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1442are now tagged.
1443
1444*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1445variables are tagged.
1446
1447*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1448
8dc78b52
FP
1449*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1450for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1451
c8d94f86 1452+++
f6737cde
GM
1453** Changes in etags.el
1454
3f6e4b8b
GM
1455*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1456tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1457is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1458
f6737cde
GM
1459*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1460the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1461
1462If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1463FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1464TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1465obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1466
1467TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1468
1469FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1470List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1471
1472A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1473
1474 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1475 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1476 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1477
1478*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1479of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1480
1481*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1482names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1483
0c68ce6f
GM
1484*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1485If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1486/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1487"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1488point will go to the beginning of the file.
1489
424d8b44 1490+++
fbc164de
PE
1491** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1492and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1493LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1494
c3eb1f10 1495+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1496** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1497Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14988859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1499GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
15008859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1501releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1502(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1503
424d8b44 1504+++
163ea954 1505** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1506remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1507appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1508
1509** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1510
424d8b44 1511+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1512** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1513
6ab8d72d 1514+++
f6499c03 1515** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1516containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1517expression from that list, are not checked.
1518
5d94f558
SS
1519** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1520When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1521and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1522the buffer, just like for the local files.
1523
dc28878c
GM
1524** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1525
df8a9f78 1526+++
95931eb1
GM
1527** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1528displays local abbrevs, only.
1529
54baed30
GM
1530** VC Changes
1531
1532VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1533easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1534Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1535to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1536changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1537`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1538version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1539each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1540file is registered in that backend.
1541
1542When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1543backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1544directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1545master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1546the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1547As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1548
1549The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1550still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1551RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1552vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1553where it doesn't make sense.)
1554
1555The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1556obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1557`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1558
1559*** General Changes
1560
1561The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1562checks are always done now.
1563
327652be 1564VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1565operations.
1566
c286608e
SM
1567`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1568`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1569`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1570
22933be8
AS
1571The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1572first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1573current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1574the working file (``merge news'').
1575
1576The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1577(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1578downwards.
1579
1580*** Multiple Backends
1581
1582VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1583useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1584repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1585commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1586local RCS archives.
1587
1588To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1589should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1590backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1591`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1592
1593If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1594it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1595Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1596by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1597backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1598VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1599happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1600from the more remote backend.
1601
1602If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1603another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1604any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1605pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1606
1607After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1608changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1609local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1610buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1611
54baed30
GM
1612*** Changes for CVS
1613
1614There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1615default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1616remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1617by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1618regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1619that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1620queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1621
22933be8
AS
1622If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1623repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1624revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1625any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1626backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1627number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1628(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1629of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1630the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1631automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1632since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1633name.)
22933be8 1634
54baed30
GM
1635If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1636repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1637If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1638commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1639current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1640entire directory tree.
1641
1642The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1643"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1644is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1645"watched" by other developers.)
1646
22933be8
AS
1647The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1648(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1649an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1650starting at the given directory.
1651
54baed30
GM
1652*** Lisp Changes in VC
1653
1654VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1655add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1656library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1657then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1658a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1659provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1660of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1661you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1662`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1663
a933dad1
DL
1664** New modes and packages
1665
79b9f6e0
MB
1666*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1667automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1668the default is not applicable.
1669
b95b34e5
GM
1670*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1671rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1672shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1673
1674Features are:
1675
1676- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1677 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1678 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1679 | / \
1680
1681- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1682 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1683 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1684 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1685 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1686 you are drawing.
1687
1688- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1689 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1690
1691- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1692 flood-filling.
1693
1694- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1695 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1696 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1697 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1698
b95b34e5
GM
1699- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1700 also do without the mouse.
1701
1702- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1703 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1704 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1705 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1706 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1707
1708- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1709
1710 lines straight-lines
1711 rectangles squares
1712 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1713 ellipses circles
1714 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1715 spray-can setting size for spraying
1716 vaporize line vaporize lines
1717 erase characters erase rectangles
1718
1719 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1720 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1721 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1722 drawing.
1723
1724 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1725 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1726 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1727 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1728
1729- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1730 can be turned off).
1731
4473cdd9
JW
1732+++
1733*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1734implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1735It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1736functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1737history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1738will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1739the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1740rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1741all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1742
ff332647 1743+++
90cbf47e
GM
1744*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1745intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1746typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1747on certain projects.
1748
894ca69e 1749+++
90cbf47e 1750*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1751regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1752
d96d6bb0 1753 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1754
1755will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1756face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1757typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1758Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1759appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1760current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1761corresponding file is read.
1762
424d8b44 1763+++
d96d6bb0 1764*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1765Emacs is idle.
1766
31fc5d15
GM
1767*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1768parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1769
5cb6a58e
SM
1770*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1771package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1772be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1773`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1774comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1775
424d8b44 1776+++
578979ee
GM
1777*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1778facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1779separate Texinfo file.
1780
424d8b44
DL
1781+++
1782*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1783by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1784provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1785`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1786enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1787
424d8b44 1788+++
6abca616
EZ
1789*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1790without invoking external programs.
1791
1792The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1793and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1794`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1795is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1796Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1797
1798The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1799page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1800
719e2c6e 1801+++
5e5dff44
GM
1802*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1803authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1804
1805The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1806the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1807the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1808Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1809even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1810single step.
1811
1812On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1813matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1814probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1815contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1816
424d8b44 1817+++
f7136ee8
GM
1818*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1819unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1820actually modifying content of a buffer.
1821
bbd9b566
GM
1822*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1823PostScript.
1824
1825Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1826
1827The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1828
1829 ; comment (until end of line)
1830 A non-terminal
1831 "C" terminal
1832 ?C? special
1833 $A default non-terminal
1834 $"C" default terminal
1835 $?C? default special
1836 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1837 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1838 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1839 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1840 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1841 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1842 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1843 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1844 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1845 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1846 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1847 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1848 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1849 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1850 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1851
1852Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1853
99453a38
GM
1854*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1855align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1856determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1857example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1858equal signs of assignments.
1859
424d8b44 1860+++
559cee90
DL
1861*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1862paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1863
424d8b44 1864+++
6448a6b3
GM
1865*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1866list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1867buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1868customize the package.
1869
6344985d
GM
1870*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1871
249652b1
GM
1872*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1873replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1874is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1875and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1876not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1877which answers different needs.
1878
424d8b44 1879+++
3476b54a
GM
1880*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1881suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1882expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1883course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1884reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1885to be enabled.
1886
424d8b44 1887+++
8964fec7
SM
1888*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1889containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1890
424d8b44 1891+++
a933dad1
DL
1892*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1893
424d8b44 1894+++
a933dad1
DL
1895*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1896
1897*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1898
8901d1ac
GM
1899Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1900`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1901disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1902`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1903displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1904and background colors.
1905
a933dad1
DL
1906*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1907Pascal) language.
1908
f6499c03 1909+++
a933dad1
DL
1910*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1911the text at point.
1912
1913*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1914
424d8b44 1915+++
8d54eb69
DL
1916*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1917
a933dad1
DL
1918*** whitespace.el ???
1919
ebcfda83
GM
1920*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1921files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1922(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1923interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1924often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1925uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1926codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1927
1928*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1929
1930Here is an example of columns:
1931
1932horse apple bus
1933dog pineapple car EXTRA
1934porcupine strawberry airplane
1935
1936Doing the following settings:
1937
1938 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1939 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1940 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1941 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1942
1943
1944Selecting the lines above and typing:
1945
1946 M-x delimit-columns-region
1947
1948It results:
1949
1950[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1951[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1952[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1953
1954delim-col has the following options:
1955
1956 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1957 before all columns.
1958
1959 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1960 between each column.
1961
1962 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1963 after all columns.
1964
1965 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1966 each column.
1967
1968delim-col has the following commands:
1969
1970 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1971 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1972
424d8b44 1973+++
f507826c 1974*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1975were operated on recently.
1976
1977M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1978
31fc5d15
GM
1979M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1980recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1981
31fc5d15
GM
1982M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1983filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1984file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1985
31fc5d15
GM
1986- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1987- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1988- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1989
31fc5d15
GM
1990The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1991dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1992
8062f458
DL
1993*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1994text.
1995
424d8b44 1996+++
36e24b82 1997*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1998of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1999specific to Message mode.
2000
424d8b44 2001+++
36e24b82
DL
2002*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2003viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2004with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2005
424d8b44 2006+++
aaa659ef
DL
2007*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2008interface to access directory servers using different directory
2009protocols. It has a separate manual.
2010
eee54b0e
DL
2011*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2012for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2013
424d8b44 2014+++
612839b6
GM
2015*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2016
5d94f558 2017*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2018minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2019
399da7e3
DL
2020*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2021with the diary features.
2022
6e417ca5
DL
2023*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2024numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2025
4a27bdfb
GM
2026*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2027Fill mode.
2028
60dd7e0e
DL
2029*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2030Gnus facilities.
2031
dace60cf
JW
2032*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2033facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2034difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2035they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2036
965bc065
DL
2037+++
2038** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2039paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2040
2041+++
2042** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2043to be visited as images.
2044
a933dad1
DL
2045** Withdrawn packages
2046
2047*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2048functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2049
3261c1d8
DL
2050*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2051
2052*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
2053
2054\f
01242779
DL
2055* Incompatible Lisp changes
2056
2057There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2058may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2059
2060** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2061`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2062
2063** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2064which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2065may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2066these properties are active.
2067
4dd4cc14 2068** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2069ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2070
2071** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2072buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2073make a difference to some code.
2074
4dd4cc14
DL
2075** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2076operates on the minibuffer.
2077
7c94ccf6
EZ
2078** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2079cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2080different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2081(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2082Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2083character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2084multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2085encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2086reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2087sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2088a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2089the buffer as multibyte characters.
2090
2091Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2092MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2093appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2094
7a39158f
DL
2095** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
2096`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail.
2097
2098** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2099long promised.
2100
2a64f8c2
DL
2101** `scroll-left' and `scroll-right' are only effective when
2102`automatic-hscrolling' is nil.
2103
01242779 2104\f
ce75fd23
GM
2105* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2106(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2107
a758f97d
GM
2108** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of of
2109function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2110args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2111(signal or normal termination).
2112
023045d6
DL
2113+++
2114** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2115from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2116
eb1b0c74
GM
2117+++
2118** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2119to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2120
52d89894
GM
2121+++
2122** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2123alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2124
693c4692 2125** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2126
1c14ba45 2127+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2128** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2129deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2130being deleted.
2131
1c14ba45 2132+++
39e776cd
SM
2133** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2134
a18a342d 2135+++
1396138a 2136** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2137If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2138skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2139with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2140C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2141charset.
2142
4fbdfdcf
MB
2143+++
2144** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2145the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2146message.
2147
6a0b0752
MB
2148** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2149expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2150
1c14ba45 2151+++
47e351a3
GM
2152** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2153with the more general `:mask' property.
2154
1c14ba45 2155+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2156** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2157
a2bd77b8
GM
2158** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2159backslash.
2160
424d8b44
DL
2161+++
2162** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2163is running in batch mode. For example,
2164
2165 (message "%s" (read t))
2166
2167will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2168to standard output.
2169
2170+++
2171** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2172`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2173
ead53494
GM
2174** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2175will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2176frame or window.
2177
f6499c03 2178+++
27848c01
GM
2179** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2180were added
2181
2182- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2183
2184Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2185a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2186
2187- Function: remq ELT LIST
2188
2189Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2190comparison is done with `eq'.
2191
1c14ba45 2192+++
27848c01 2193** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2194
b548072f
GM
2195** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2196has been changed.
2197
424d8b44 2198+++
07b14857
KH
2199** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2200without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2201convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2202
1c14ba45 2203+++
9662da0b
GM
2204** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2205or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2206
7fce7efb
DL
2207** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2208function was declared obsolete.
2209
1c14ba45 2210+++
5d94f558 2211** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2212retained as an alias).
2213
f98d3086
SM
2214** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2215It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2216is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2217
87efd256
GM
2218** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2219
39b39373
GM
2220- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2221
2222Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2223omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2224the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2225even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2226minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2227means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2228
67c9a1d2
GM
2229** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2230
2231- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2232
2233Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2234
2235This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2236calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2237argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2238value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2239returned.
2240
2241Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2242if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2243it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2244minibuffer even if it is active.
2245
2246Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2247counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2248too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2249and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2250`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2251entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2252
2253ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2254ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2255ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2256ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2257ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2258If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2259Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2260
ead53494
GM
2261** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2262event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2263argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2264
25fa6deb
GM
2265** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2266call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2267message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2268Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2269
5d94f558 2270** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2271meaning no limit.
2272
5d94f558 2273** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2274coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2275DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2276
9b2999d0
DL
2277+++
2278** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2279list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2280
c286608e
SM
2281** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2282
9b2999d0 2283+++
80c05bd3
DL
2284** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2285buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2286This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2287than replacing the local map.
2288
4bc7a543
DL
2289** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2290after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2291
2292** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2293
f6499c03 2294+++
c286608e
SM
2295** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2296as promised long ago.
f0298744 2297
5d94f558 2298** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2299\f
2300* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2301
2302Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2303--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2304When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2305so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2306
85c75536
MB
2307*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2308buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2309the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2310restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2311
0b8a3a6d
DL
2312*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2313`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2314when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2315multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2316
2317*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2318`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2319contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2320
2321*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2322changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2323[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2324regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2325the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2326extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2327bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2328eight-bit-graphic.
2329
2330** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2331
2332A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2333a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2334character set as previously.
2335
2336*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2337They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2338modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2339
2340CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2341characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2342range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2343case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2344
2345FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2346name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2347
2348*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2349registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2350"fontset-default".
2351
2352*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2353argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2354
2355** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2356composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2357buffers and strings.
2358
2359*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2360character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2361code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2362have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2363composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2364composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2365The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2366also been deleted.
2367
2368*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2369specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2370`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2371
2372*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2373MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2374composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2375may differ between buffer and string text.
2376
2377*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2378COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2379
2380*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2381directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2382Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2383`composition' from STRING.
2384
2385*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2386a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2387
2388*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2389obsolete.
2390
965bc065 2391** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2392`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2393for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2394U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2395
2396** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2397`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2398X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2399
2400+++
2401** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2402are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 24030xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2404
399da7e3 2405+++
f0124b4a
DL
2406** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2407that offset in the file before writing.
2408
f98d3086
SM
2409** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2410compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2411
612839b6
GM
2412** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2413`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2414from which the command was issued.
2415
2416** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2417`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2418`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2419additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2420operate on.
2421
271b4185
GM
2422** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2423to `window-buffer-height'.
2424
2425- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2426
2427Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2428The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2429lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2430
2431Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2432respectively.
2433
2434If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2435COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2436
2437The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2438obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2439on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2440
2441Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2442buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2443possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2444is currently displayed in some window.
2445
3c30cb6e
DL
2446** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2447argument function's results.
2448
62f20204
GM
2449** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2450signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2451
c0510d27 2452** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2453header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2454
2455** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2456ignores differences in case and text representation.
2457
2458** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2459cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2460as follows:
2461
2462 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2463 nil don't display a cursor
2464 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2465 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2466 others display a box cursor.
2467
9a0dd3dc
GM
2468** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2469an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2470defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2471set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2472
d7b511c4 2473** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2474specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2475the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2476text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2477
2478Example:
2479
2480 (string-to-syntax "()")
2481 => (4 . 41)
2482
1fa28578
GM
2483** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2484other than 10.
2485
2486*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2487INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2488
5d94f558 2489 #b1111
1fa28578 2490 => 15
5d94f558 2491 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2492 => -15
2493
2494*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2495
5d94f558 2496 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2497 => 438
2498
2499*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2500
5d94f558 2501 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2502 => 48815
2503
2504*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2505
5d94f558 2506 #2R-111
1fa28578 2507 => -7
5d94f558 2508 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2509 => 267
2510
3d4ff2dd 2511** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2512the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2513and isn't a string.
2514
3d4ff2dd
GM
2515** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2516a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2517value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2518not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2519
16ce590d
DL
2520+++
2521** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2522
73825616 2523** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2524for a regexp in a string.
2525
2526** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2527`mouse-position-function'.
2528
723e779c
GM
2529** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2530that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2531
d1e103b2
GM
2532** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2533Keywords are now always considered constants.
2534
31047e0d
DL
2535+++
2536** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2537returns it.
2538
7a85e4df
GM
2539** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2540returned by function `recent-keys'.
2541
02b14400
RS
2542+++
2543** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2544can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2545Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2546etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2547mode.
404fa7d6 2548
02b14400 2549+++
8964fec7
SM
2550** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2551and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2552
02b14400
RS
2553+++
2554** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2555has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2556function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2557returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2558been performed."
2559
2560When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2561and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2562hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2563then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2564
02b14400 2565+++
81da8b32
GM
2566** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2567In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2568and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2569
02b14400 2570+++
9e207b90
GM
2571** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2572with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2573specified table.
2574
2575 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2576
2577Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2578TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2579saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2580what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2581
02b14400 2582+++
d7f89643 2583** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2584Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2585Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2586corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2587Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2588
02b14400 2589+++
dde9e75a
GM
2590** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2591removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2592
02b14400 2593+++
9da30515
GM
2594** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2595instead of being optional.
2596
02b14400 2597+++
d20679eb
GM
2598** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2599modify read-only text.
2600
02b14400 2601+++
fbc164de
PE
2602** New functions and variables for locales.
2603
2604The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2605decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2606time functions like strftime. The new variables
2607`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2608locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2609
2610The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2611environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2612the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2613environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2614not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2615`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2616`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2617
02b14400 2618+++
863476d1
SM
2619** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2620To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2621modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2622start sequences.
2623
02b14400 2624+++
ef6d912c
GM
2625** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2626because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2627
02b14400 2628+++
a933dad1
DL
2629** New function `propertize'
2630
2631The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2632strings with text properties.
2633
2634- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2635
2636Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2637by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2638PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2639specified value of that property. Example:
2640
2641 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2642
2643+++
2644** push and pop macros.
2645
02b14400
RS
2646Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2647are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2648as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2649
2650(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2651(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2652 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2653
02b14400
RS
2654** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2655
6c7fd5aa
RS
2656Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2657are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2658
2659(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2660 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2661 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2662 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2663
2664(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2665 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2666 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2667 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2668
a933dad1 2669+++
6c083b4c
GM
2670** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2671[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2672class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2673or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2674
2675[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2676[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2677[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2678[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2679[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2680 space, and DEL.
2681[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2682 and DEL.
2683[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2684 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2685 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2686[:alpha:] matches letters.
2687 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2688 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2689[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2690[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2691[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2692[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2693 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2694 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2695[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2696[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2697[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2698
2699+++
2700** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2701
2702The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2703
2704- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2705
2706The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2707are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2708
2709:test TEST
2710
2711TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2712Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2713it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2714
2715:size SIZE
2716
2717SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2718many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2719
2720:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2721
2722REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2723full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2724size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
27251.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2726old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2727
2728:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2729
2730THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2731hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2732(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2733
2734:weakness WEAK
2735
b548072f
GM
2736WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2737`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2738`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2739collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2740outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2741
2742- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2743
2744Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2745
2746- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2747
2748Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2749
2750- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2751
2752Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2753values are shared.
2754
2755- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2756
2757Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2758
2759- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2760
2761Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2762
2763- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2764
2765Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2766
2767- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2768
2769Returns the size of TABLE.
2770
d96d6bb0 2771- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2772
2773Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2774
2775- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2776
2777Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2778
2779- Function: clrhash TABLE
2780
2781Clear TABLE.
2782
2783- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2784
2785Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2786not found.
2787
79214ddf 2788- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2789
2790Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2791another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2792
2793- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2794
2795Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2796
2797- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2798
2799Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2800arguments KEY and VALUE.
2801
2802- Function: sxhash OBJ
2803
2804Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2805
2806- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2807
2808Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2809a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2810comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2811and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2812of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2813
2814TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2815
2816HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2817code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2818integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2819
2820Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2821be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2822
2823 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2824 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2825
2826 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2827 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2828
79214ddf 2829 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2830 'case-fold-string-hash))
2831
2832 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2833
2834+++
2835** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2836
2837It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2838circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2839a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2840
2841+++
2842** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2843
2844If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2845#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2846
a933dad1
DL
2847+++
2848** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2849t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2850specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2851is too short to reach that column.
2852
2853+++
2854** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2855now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2856after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2857two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2858
2859If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2860perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2861and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2862
2863+++
2864** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2865to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2866
2867+++
2868** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2869calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2870
2871+++
2872** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2873directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2874small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2875small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2876temporary-file-directory instead.
2877
2878+++
2879** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2880the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2881`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2882hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2883
2884+++
2885** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2886elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2887
2888+++
2889** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2890
2891make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2892creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2893ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2894
2895+++
2896** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2897
2898The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2899on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2900is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2901never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2902ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2903overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2904
2905If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2906that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2907to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2908The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2909
2910+++
2911** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2912
2913Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2914If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2915ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2916result string.
2917
2918Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2919string where arguments appear in the result string.
2920
2921Example:
2922
2923 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2924 (s2 "world"))
2925 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2926 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2927 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2928
2929results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2930
2931+++
2932** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2933
2934Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2935The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2936argument in it.
2937
2938 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2939 (arg "world"))
2940 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2941 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2942 (message msg arg))
2943
2944+++
2945** Sound support
2946
2947Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2948(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2949
2950Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2951(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2952to enable sound support.
2953
2954Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2955list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2956when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2957functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2958sound to play, before playing the sound.
2959
2960The following sound properties are supported:
2961
2962- `:file FILE'
2963
2964FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2965searched relative to `data-directory'.
2966
6fb40beb
GM
2967- `:data DATA'
2968
2969DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2970may be present, but not both.
2971
a933dad1
DL
2972- `:volume VOLUME'
2973
2974VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
29750..1. This property is optional.
2976
01242779
DL
2977- `:device DEVICE'
2978
2979DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2980sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2981
a933dad1
DL
2982Other properties are ignored.
2983
01242779
DL
2984An alternative interface is called as
2985(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2986
a933dad1 2987** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2988
9b2999d0 2989+++
356673d4
DL
2990** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2991a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2992
2993** Changes to garbage collection
2994
2995*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2996of live and free strings.
2997
2998*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2999strings that have been consed so far.
3000
a933dad1 3001\f
04545643
GM
3002* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3003Lisp Manual
3004
f7eb32aa 3005+++
a299a6f0
GM
3006** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3007mini-windows.
3008
9b2999d0 3009+++
26fcde61
MB
3010** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3011argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3012returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3013
a299a6f0 3014** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3015
9a8d84ca
DL
3016+++
3017** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3018
9b2999d0 3019+++
2c69ced2
GM
3020** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3021image.
3022
3023- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3024
3025Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3026
3027SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3028measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3029character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3030font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3031FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3032
9b2999d0 3033+++
ebb8f116
GM
3034** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3035has a mask bitmap.
3036
3037- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3038
3039Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3040FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3041or omitted means use the selected frame.
3042
f6499c03 3043+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3044** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3045satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3046
3047+++
3048** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3049optional.
3050
f6499c03
DL
3051+++
3052** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3053below).
04545643
GM
3054
3055\f
a933dad1
DL
3056* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3057
3058Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3059--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3060When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3061so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3062
f6d3257b
GM
3063** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3064to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3065
3066Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3067text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3068is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3069your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3070laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3071just display it black instead.
3072
3073This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3074a line like
3075
3076 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3077
3078in your `.emacs'.
3079
a933dad1
DL
3080** New face implementation.
3081
3082Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3083font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3084
3085+++
3086*** New faces.
3087
3088Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3089
3090 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3091
a933dad1
DL
3092 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3093 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3094
a933dad1 3095 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3096
a933dad1 3097 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3098
a933dad1 3099 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3100
a933dad1 3101 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3102
a933dad1
DL
3103 7. Background color.
3104
3105 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3106
3107 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3108
3109 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3110
3111 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3112
3113 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3114 color.
3115
3116 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3117 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3118
3119Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3120same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3121frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3122faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3123with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3124attributes mentioned above.
3125
3126There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3127definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3128created frames.
79214ddf 3129
a933dad1
DL
3130A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3131have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3132`fully-specified'.
3133
3134+++
3135*** Face merging.
3136
3137The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3138combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3139aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3140properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3141that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3142results in a fully-specified face.
3143
3144+++
3145*** Face realization.
3146
3147After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3148merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3149realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3150available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3151face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3152cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3153
3154Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3155character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3156for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3157charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3158
3159Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3160specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3161being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3162the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3163statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3164
3165In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3166`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
31670x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3168the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3169initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3170Emacs.
3171
3172Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3173`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3174registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3175with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3176
a7c13351 3177+++
a933dad1
DL
3178**** Clearing face caches.
3179
3180The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3181on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3182unused fonts.
3183
3184+++
3185*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3186
a933dad1
DL
3187Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3188given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3189for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3190
3191If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3192pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3193family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3194property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3195an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3196
3197Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3198against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3199match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3200
3201Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3202
3203The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3204attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3205face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3206names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3207that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3208width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3209to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3210
52d89894
GM
3211Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3212alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
af4bb4c8
KH
3213doesn't exist.
3214
3215Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3216all alternative font registry names to try for a face speciying a
3217registry.
3218
3219Please note that the iterpretations of the above two variables are
3220slightly different.
3221
3222Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3223
a933dad1
DL
3224
3225+++
3226**** Scalable fonts
3227
3228Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3229since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3230servers.
3231
3232To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3233`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3234scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3235Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3236scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3237that list. Example:
3238
3239 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3240
3241allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3242
3243+++
3244*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3245
3246- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3247
3248Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3249is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3250string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3251
3252If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3253the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3254FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3255POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3256SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3257These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3258if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3259REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3260the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3261of the face font sort order.
3262
79214ddf 3263- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3264
3265Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3266omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3267(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3268non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3269
3270- Variable: font-list-limit
3271
3272Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3273won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3274matching font. The default is currently 100.
3275
3276+++
3277*** Setting face attributes.
3278
3279For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3280with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3281implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3282`face-attribute'.
3283
3284Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3285symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3286
3287The following attributes are recognized:
3288
3289`:family'
3290
3291VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3292or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3293and `?' are allowed.
3294
3295`:width'
3296
3297VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3298It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3299`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3300`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3301
3302`:height'
3303
787345ff
MB
3304VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3305in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3306scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3307height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3308
3309`:weight'
3310
3311VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3312symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3313`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3314
3315`:slant'
3316
3317VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3318symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3319`reverse-oblique'.
3320
3321`:foreground', `:background'
3322
3323VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3324
3325`:underline'
3326
3327VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3328VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3329a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3330don't underline.
3331
3332`:overline'
3333
3334VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3335VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3336string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3337overline.
3338
3339`:strike-through'
3340
3341VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3342striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3343face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3344is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3345
3346`:box'
3347
3348VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3349around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3350VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3351of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3352and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3353VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3354:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3355the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3356specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3357defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3358the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3359color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3360should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3361like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3362that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3363the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3364box.
3365
3366`:inverse-video'
3367
3368VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3369inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3370
3371`:stipple'
3372
3373If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3374The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3375searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3376HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3377is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3378explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3379
3380For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3381and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3382
3383`:font'
3384
3385Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3386XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3387is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3388versions of Emacs.
3389
3390For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3391be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3392must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3393
3394Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3395`defface'.
3396
787345ff
MB
3397`:inherit'
3398
3399VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3400of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3401like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3402
a933dad1
DL
3403*** Face attributes and X resources
3404
3405The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3406from X resources:
3407
3408 Face attribute X resource class
3409-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3410 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3411 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3412 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3413 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3414 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3415 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3416 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3417 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3418 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3419 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3420 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3421 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3422 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3423 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3424 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3425 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3426 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3427 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3428 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3429
3430+++
3431*** Text property `face'.
3432
3433The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3434specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3435specification can be
3436
34371. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3438
34392. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3440 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3441 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3442 for face attribute names.
3443
34443. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3445 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3446 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3447
3448+++
3449** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3450
acf3ecb7
EZ
3451The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3452on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3453the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3454default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3455`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3456used to clear the mapping table.
3457
acf3ecb7
EZ
3458** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3459
3460The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3461and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3462type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3463color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3464display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3465old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3466`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3467compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3468should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3469modify their color-related behavior.
3470
3471The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3472any frame type.
3473
8a5719f0
EZ
3474** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3475
3476The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3477`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3478`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3479`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3480`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3481`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3482display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3483the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3484platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3485
a933dad1
DL
3486+++
3487** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3488
463cac2d 3489This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3490To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3491the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3492`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3493
3494The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3495end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3496Otherwise, it returns zero.
3497
463cac2d
GM
3498** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3499
3500There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3501buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3502property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3503
9a9dfda8 3504Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3505forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3506to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3507not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3508commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3509boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3510`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3511functions.
463cac2d
GM
3512
3513Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3514a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3515editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3516
9a9dfda8
GM
3517The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3518
59927f88 3519- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3520
3521Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3522
9a9dfda8
GM
3523A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3524If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3525constrained position if that is is different.
3526
3527If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3528positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3529ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3530constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3531as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3532is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3533fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3534the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3535also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3536
3537If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3538NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3539unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3540C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3541only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3542
59927f88
MB
3543If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3544a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3545
3546Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3547
3548- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3549
59927f88 3550Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3551A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3552If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3553
3554- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3555
3556Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3557A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3558If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3559If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3560field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3561
3562- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3563
3564Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3565A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3566If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3567If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3568then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3569
3570- Function: field-string &optional POS
3571
3572Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3573A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3574If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3575
3576- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3577
3578Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3579A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3580If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3581
a933dad1
DL
3582+++
3583** Image support.
3584
3585Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3586strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3587(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3588replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3589
3590If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3591`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3592AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3593window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3594area.
3595
3596IMAGE is an image specification.
3597
3598*** Image specifications
3599
3600Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3601is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3602specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3603symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3604described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3605
3606The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3607
3608`:ascent ASCENT'
3609
576da55d
GM
3610ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3611If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3612to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3613
3614If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3615image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3616
5d94f558 3617If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3618centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3619of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3620overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3621
3622`:margin MARGIN'
3623
79214ddf 3624MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3625margin around the image. Default is 0.
3626
3627`:relief RELIEF'
3628
3629RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3630around an image.
3631
3632`:algorithm ALGO'
3633
47e351a3
GM
3634Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3635
3636ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3637edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3638
3639ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3640apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3641nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3642position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3643around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3644neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3645transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3646x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3647below.
3648
3649 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3650 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3651 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3652
3653The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3654resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3655multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3656of the factors' absolute values.
3657
327652be 3658Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3659
47e351a3
GM
3660 (1 0 0
3661 0 0 0
3662 9 9 -1)
3663
3664Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3665
3666 ( 2 -1 0
3667 -1 0 1
3668 0 1 -2)
3669
ba9eeda1
GM
3670ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3671``disabled''.
3672
47e351a3
GM
3673`:mask MASK'
3674
3675If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3676the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3677image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3678background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3679image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3680the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3681GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3682image.
a933dad1 3683
47e351a3
GM
3684If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3685in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3686`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3687
3688`:file FILE'
3689
3690Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3691search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3692building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3693may be present in the image specification.
3694
518df5c4
GM
3695`:data DATA'
3696
3697Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3698supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3699present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3700support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3701
a933dad1
DL
3702*** Supported image types
3703
b246b1f6 3704**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3705
3706XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3707properties supported are
3708
3709`:foreground FG'
3710
3711FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3712is the frame's foreground.
3713
46c5af7f 3714`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3715
3716BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3717the frame's background color.
3718
3719XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3720case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3721instead of a `:file' property.
3722
3723`:width WIDTH'
3724
3725WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3726
3727`:height HEIGHT'
3728
3729HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3730
3731`:data DATA'
3732
3733DATA must be either
3734
3735 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3736 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3737
3738 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3739
3740 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3741 bitmap.
3742
c76e04a8
GM
3743 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3744 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3745 in the file.
3746
a933dad1
DL
3747**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3748
3749XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3750`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3751found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3752`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3753
3754Additional image properties supported are:
3755
3756`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3757
3758SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3759name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3760name.
3761
3762XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3763add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3764
a933dad1
DL
3765The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3766to display compressed images.
3767
3768**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3769
3770PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3771mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3772mono images are
3773
3774`:foreground FG'
3775
3776FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3777is the frame's foreground.
3778
3779`:background FG'
3780
3781BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3782the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3783
3784**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3785
3786Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3787package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3788are:
3789
a933dad1
DL
3790**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3791
3792Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3793package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3794properties defined.
3795
3796**** GIF, image type `gif'
3797
3798Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3799`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3800
3801Additional image properties supported are:
3802
3803`:index INDEX'
3804
3805INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3806multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3807
3808This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3809For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3810at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3811every 0.1 seconds.
3812
3813(defun show-anim (file max)
3814 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3815 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3816
3817(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3818 (when (= idx max)
3819 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3820 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3821 (save-excursion
3822 (set-buffer buffer)
3823 (goto-char (point-min))
3824 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3825 (insert-image img "x"))
3826 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3827
3828**** PNG, image type `png'
3829
3830Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3831package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3832properties defined.
3833
3834**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3835
3836Additional image properties supported are:
3837
3838`:pt-width WIDTH'
3839
3840WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3841integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3842
3843`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3844
3845HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3846must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3847
3848`:bounding-box BOX'
3849
3850BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3851the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3852files. This is an required property.
3853
3854Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3855lisp/gs.el.
3856
3857*** Lisp interface.
3858
79214ddf
FP
3859The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3860which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3861
3862Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3863they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3864The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3865manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3866images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3867
3868*** Simplified image API, image.el
3869
3870The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3871creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3872can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3873define an image based on available image types. The functions
3874`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3875buffer.
3876
3877+++
3878** Display margins.
3879
3880Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3881and images.
3882
3883To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3884`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3885`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3886obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3887`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3888the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3889of the display margins.
3890
3891You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3892containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3893one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3894string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3895in this file).
3896
3897+++
3898** Help display
3899
3900Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3901moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3902`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3903that have a `help-echo' property.
3904
9662da0b 3905If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3906is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3907the window in which the help was found.
3908
3909If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3910`help-echo' text property was found.
3911
3912If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3913POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3914
3915If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3916the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3917mouse.
d5aa31d8 3918
9662da0b
GM
3919If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3920string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3921
3922For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3923determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3924property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3925For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3926used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3927
3928The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3929the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3930causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3931
3932+++
3933** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3934
3935The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3936This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3937
3938The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3939scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3940The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3941scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3942used.
3943
79214ddf
FP
3944 (global-set-key [A-down]
3945 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3946 (interactive)
79214ddf 3947 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3948 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3949 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3950 #'(lambda ()
3951 (interactive)
79214ddf 3952 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3953 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3954
3955+++
3956** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3957
3958Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3959when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3960variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3961is called with one argument, POS.
3962
3963At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3964characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3965as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3966property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3967`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3968
3969+++
3970** Tool bar support.
3971
3972Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3973parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3974controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3975suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3976`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3977automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3978
3979*** Tool bar item definitions
3980
3981Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3982`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3983where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3984
a933dad1
DL
3985CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3986evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3987the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3988property (see below).
79214ddf 3989
a933dad1
DL
3990BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3991binding are currently ignored.
3992
3993The following properties are recognized:
3994
3995`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3996
a933dad1
DL
3997FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3998or disabled.
79214ddf 3999
a933dad1 4000`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 4001
a933dad1 4002FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 4003
a933dad1
DL
4004`:filter FUNCTION'
4005
4006FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4007FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4008used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4009
a933dad1
DL
4010`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4011
4012TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4013and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4014
a933dad1
DL
4015`:image IMAGES'
4016
4017IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4018image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4019meaning of each of the four elements:
4020
4021 Index Use when item is
4022 ----------------------------------------
4023 0 enabled and selected
4024 1 enabled and deselected
4025 2 disabled and selected
4026 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4027
4ba7246d
GM
4028If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4029algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4030
a933dad1 4031`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4032
a933dad1
DL
4033Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4034is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4035
dab96841 4036The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4037toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4038to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4039menu bar.
dab96841 4040
8628686a
DL
4041The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4042dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4043buffer-locally to override the global map.
4044
a933dad1
DL
4045*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4046
4047If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4048resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4049than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4050
79214ddf 4051If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4052raised when the mouse moves over them.
4053
4054You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4055`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4056pixels. Default is 1.
4057
4058You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4059`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4060
4061*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4062
4063You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4064a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4065
4066 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4067 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4068 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4069
4070is the original tool bar item definition, then
4071
4072 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4073
4074makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4075item.
4076
4077** Mode line changes.
4078
4079+++
4080*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4081
4082The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4083that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4084a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4085
40861. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4087a `local-map' text property.
4088
40892. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4090that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4091
40923. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4093is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4094`local-map' property.
4095
4096The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4097properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4098example.
4099
54522c9f
GM
4100*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4101evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4102
a933dad1
DL
4103+++
4104*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4105variable mode-line-format to nil.
4106
4107+++
4108*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4109
4110This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4111`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4112completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4113`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4114line.
4115
4116The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4117`header-line'.
4118
4119The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4120position in the header-line.
4121
4122+++
4123** Text property `display'
4124
623a0aae
GM
4125The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4126replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4127also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4128the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4129below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4130
623a0aae
GM
4131*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4132
4133To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4134text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4135
4136If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4137marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4138the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4139is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4140simpler form STRING as property value.
4141
a933dad1
DL
4142*** Variable width and height spaces
4143
4144To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4145specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4146`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4147area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4148marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4149displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4150simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4151
4152The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4153PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4154properties described below.
4155
4156The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4157characters having the `display' property.
4158
4159- :width WIDTH
4160
4161Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4162character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4163
4164- :relative-width FACTOR
4165
4166Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4167first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4168same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4169width of that character by FACTOR.
4170
4171- :align-to HPOS
4172
4173Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4174value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4175
4176Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4177
4178- :height HEIGHT
4179
4180Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4181normal line height.
4182
4183- :relative-height FACTOR
4184
4185The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4186of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4187
4188- :ascent ASCENT
4189
4190Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4191used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4192baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4193equal to 100.
4194
4195You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4196
4197*** Images
4198
4199A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4200. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4201in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4202their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4203the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4204`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4205area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4206the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4207as display specification.
4208
4209*** Other display properties
4210
c9e73000 4211- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4212
4213Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4214should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4215integer or float.
4216
c9e73000 4217- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4218
4219Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4220
4221If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4222means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4223the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4224``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4225a font is available counts as a step.
4226
4227If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4228as tall as the frame's default font.
4229
4230If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4231height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4232
4233Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4234`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4235
c9e73000 4236- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4237
4238FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4239font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4240raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4241amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4242`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4243
4244*** Conditional display properties
4245
4246All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4247has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4248applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4249During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4250the text having the `display' property.
4251
4252The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4253`(:when t SPEC)'.
4254
4255+++
4256** New menu separator types.
4257
4258Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4259item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4260treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4261to specify other menu separator types.
4262
4263- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4264
4265No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4266separator occurs.
4267
4268- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4269
4270A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4271
4272- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4273
4274A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4275
4276- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4277
4278A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4279
4280- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4281
4282A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4283
4284- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4285
4286A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4287displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4288
4289- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4290
4291A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4292
4293- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4294
4295A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4296
4297- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4298
4299A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4300
4301- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4302
4303Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4304
4305- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4306
4307Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4308
4309- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4310
4311Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4312
4313- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4314
4315Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4316
4317Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4318the corresponding single-line separators.
4319
4320+++
4321** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4322
4323The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4324`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4325Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4326that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4327default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4328default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4329default foreground is black.
4330
4331The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4332(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4333`ScrollBarBackground').
4334
4335Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4336settings for scroll bar colors.
4337
4338+++
4339** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4340display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4341
4342---
4343** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4344starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4345on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4346line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4347the original window start.
4348
4349---
4350** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4351`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4352now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4353
4354+++
4355** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4356
4357A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4358`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4359windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4360other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4361
4362The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4363fixed-width and fixed-height.
4364
4365 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4366
4367A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4368fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4369window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4370change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4371temporarily to nil, for example
4372
4373 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4374 (enlarge-window 10))
4375
79214ddf 4376Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4377or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4378
4379** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4380terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4381to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4382overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4383horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4384support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4385
3787e12e 4386
79dfd2cd 4387\f
3787e12e
GM
4388* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4389
4390** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4391input.
4392
4393** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4394
4395** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4396
4397** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4398only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4399exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4400(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4401(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4402
4403** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4404been added.
4405
79dfd2cd 4406\f
3787e12e
GM
4407* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4408
4409** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4410
79dfd2cd 4411\f
3787e12e
GM
4412* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4413
4414** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4415M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4416\f
4417* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4418
4419** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4420
4421You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4422Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4423`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4424
4425If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4426is the one that is used.
4427
4428** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4429the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4430Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4431separate from the command's regular output.
4432Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4433says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4434In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4435the buffer name.
4436
4437When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4438output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4439it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4440cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4441
4442** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4443the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4444is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4445created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4446
4447** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4448example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4449match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4450quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4451
4452** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4453now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4454if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4455they never ignore case.
4456
4457** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4458under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4459applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4460of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4461just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4462convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4463part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4464
4465If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4466the same format that was used in the file before.
4467
4468You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4469`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4470
4471** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4472renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4473This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4474
4475** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4476The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4477buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4478your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4479is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4480end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4481Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4482
4483The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4484eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4485control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4486format. You can now customize these variables.
4487
4488** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4489filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4490filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4491enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4492
4493** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4494in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4495windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4496
4497** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4498dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4499doesn't have any effect.
4500
4501** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4502not one per buffer.
4503
4504** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4505use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4506 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4507
4508** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4509To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4510`auto-show-mode' command.
4511
4512** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4513avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4514versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4515choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4516occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4517
4518** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4519cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4520
4521** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4522character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4523feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4524
4525** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4526the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4527interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4528and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4529
4530** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4531
4532The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4533that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4534one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4535codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4536set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4537
4538Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4539from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4540
4541IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4542equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4543a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4544`?' on other systems.
4545
4546IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4547feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4548Unix.
4549
4550Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4551current codepage when it starts.
4552
4553** Mail changes
4554
4555*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4556`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4557appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4558non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4559MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4560headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4561latin-1:
4562
4563 MIME-version: 1.0
4564 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4565 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4566
4567*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4568default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4569default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4570sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4571buffer-file-coding-system.
4572
4573You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4574sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4575mail.
4576
4577*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4578if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4579Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4580list of possible coding systems.
4581
4582** CC Mode changes
4583
4584*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4585modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4586longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4587docstring for details.
4588
4589*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4590symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4591found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4592prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4593lineup functions use this feature currently.
4594
4595*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4596"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4597
4598*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4599"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4600
4601*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4602from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4603symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4604c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4605anonymous classes.
4606
4607*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4608syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4609
4610*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4611inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4612support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4613function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4614
4615*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4616(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4617brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4618c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4619(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4620
4621*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4622
4623*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4624
4625*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4626for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4627
4628*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4629
4630*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4631associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4632This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4633circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4634class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4635
4636** Gnus changes.
4637
4638*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4639added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4640Gnus manual for the full story.
4641
4642*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4643before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4644group, which is created automatically.
4645
4646*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4647values.
4648
4649*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4650
4651*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4652outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4653
4654*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4655`C-u C-c C-c'.
4656
4657*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4658
4659*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4660re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4661
4662*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4663
4664*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4665Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4666
4667*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4668`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4669
4670*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4671control over simplification.
4672
4673*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4674
4675*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4676limit.
4677
4678*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4679
4680*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4681
4682*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4683If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4684rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4685
4686*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4687`a' forces normal posting method.
4688
4689*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4690-- `W d'.
4691
4692*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4693to a non-nil value.
4694
4695*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4696where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4697
4698*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4699has been added.
4700
4701*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4702
4703*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4704
4705*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4706`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4707
4708*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4709`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4710
4711*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4712
4713*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4714been added.
4715
4716*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4717`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4718
4719*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4720updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4721
4722*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4723
4724*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4725
4726*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4727
4728** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4729
4730*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4731options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4732nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4733
4734*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4735TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4736of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4737TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4738can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4739
4740*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4741All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4742but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4743the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4744
4745*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4746the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4747buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4748mismatch.
4749
4750** Changes to RefTeX mode
4751
4752*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4753file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4754
4755*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4756lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4757characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4758removed from the label.
4759
4760*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4761a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4762
4763*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4764customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4765
4766*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4767`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4768expressions.
4769
4770*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4771
4772** New/deleted modes and packages
4773
4774*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4775SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4776
4777*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4778editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4779SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4780
4781*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4782changes with a special face.
4783
4784*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4785this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4786Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4787\f
4788* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4789
4790** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4791This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4792conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4793and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4794check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4795
4796The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4797Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4798distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4799
4800** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4801MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4802controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4803directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4804Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4805on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4806string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4807program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4808printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4809
4810** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4811output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4812available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4813input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4814temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4815program.
4816
4817An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4818and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4819programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4820automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4821as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4822ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4823
4824** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4825a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4826MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4827was not documented clearly before.
4828
4829** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4830This includes Tetris and Snake.
4831\f
4832* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4833
4834** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4835return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4836They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4837meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4838
4839** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4840WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4841and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4842
4843** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4844
4845*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4846It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4847
4848*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4849the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4850integers.
4851
4852** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4853files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4854arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4855file names and attributes are returned.
4856
4857** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4858sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4859accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4860It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4861returns the result.
4862
4863** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4864to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4865
4866** New functions for base64 conversion:
4867
4868The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4869into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4870performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4871optionally.
4872
4873Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4874job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4875
4876**
4877The new function process-running-child-p
4878will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4879terminal to its own child process.
4880
4881** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4882when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4883to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4884itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4885
4886** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4887be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4888
4889** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4890:included is an alias for :visible.
4891
4892easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4893easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4894to move or copy menu entries.
4895
4896** Multibyte editing changes
4897
4898*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4899an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4900make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4901work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4902char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4903 (setq char (sref str idx)
4904 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4905The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4906
4907If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4908(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4909 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4910
4911*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4912region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4913deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4914
4915 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4916
4917This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4918across the boundary.
4919
4920*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4921`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4922 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4923 contains 8-bit characters.
4924 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4925 contains invalid characters.
4926
4927*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4928text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4929preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4930text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4931way.
4932
4933*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4934If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4935end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4936prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4937
4938*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4939compose Thai characters in a string.
4940
4941** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4942argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4943for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4944menus should always use the third argument.
4945
4946** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4947read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4948arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4949input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4950
4951** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4952of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4953programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4954inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4955
4956** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4957the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4958returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4959echo area contents.
4960
4961 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4962
4963** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4964NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4965requested feature cannot be loaded.
4966
4967** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4968foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4969means to clear out that attribute.
4970
4971** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4972gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4973
4974** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4975read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4976unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4977end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4978
4979** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4980the gap of the current buffer.
4981
4982** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4983to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4984current buffer.
4985
4986** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4987facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4988These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4989it back in after any modifications have been made.
4990\f
4991* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4992
4993** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4994the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4995/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4996directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4997subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4998
4999Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5000names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5001Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5002which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5003these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5004
5005Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5006starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5007time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5008
5009This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5010Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5011to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5012subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5013`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5014results.
5015
5016** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5017GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5018that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5019fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
5020\f
5021* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5022
5023** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5024including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5025it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5026perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5027
5028** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5029specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5030region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5031further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5032command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5033within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5034are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5035region.
5036
5037In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5038selective undo.
5039
5040** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5041unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5042buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5043effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5044Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5045
5046The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5047though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5048-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5049load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5050
5051** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5052no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5053enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5054something that most users not do.
5055
5056** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5057operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5058The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5059applications.
5060
5061C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5062pasting operations.
5063
5064** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5065setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5066like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5067printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5068`ps-printer-name'.
5069
5070** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5071minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5072any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5073except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5074incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5075hits a new word.
5076
5077Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5078Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5079to be confused by TeX commands.
5080
5081You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5082correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5083clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5084of various alternative replacements and actions.
5085
5086Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5087the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5088corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5089alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5090flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5091
5092Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5093flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5094
5095** Changes in input method usage.
5096
5097Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5098the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5099respectively.
5100
5101You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5102
5103If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5104of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5105
5106The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5107that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5108
5109 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5110
5111 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5112
5113 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5114 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5115
5116 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5117 given in the following case:
5118 o When you are using a complex input method.
5119 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5120
5121If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5122input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5123and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5124setting it to t is helpful.
5125
5126The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5127
5128In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5129keys:
5130 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5131 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5132 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5133These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5134environment.
5135
5136** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5137names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5138minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5139get
5140
5141 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5142
5143which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5144
5145Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5146Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5147
5148** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5149at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5150its owner and group.
5151
5152** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5153Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5154
5155** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5156contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5157
5158** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5159which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5160in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5161by the left edge of the rectangle.
5162
5163** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5164increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5165C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5166for writing keyboard macros.
5167
5168** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5169files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5170frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5171the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5172additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5173info.
5174
5175** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5176
5177** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5178query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5179contents only.
5180
5181** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5182confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5183the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5184says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5185
5186** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5187non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5188literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5189
5190** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5191now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5192Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5193inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5194
5195** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5196failure if the command produces no output.
5197
5198** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5199manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5200the mouse.
5201
5202** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5203mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5204function and variable names.
5205
5206** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5207reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5208file-coding-system-alist.
5209
5210** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5211t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5212converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5213the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5214according to the current fontset.
5215
5216** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5217
5218The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5219that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5220nonascii-insert-offset.
5221
5222For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5223enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5224nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5225characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5226
5227** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5228an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5229
5230** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5231letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5232
5233** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5234are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5235command keys.
5236
5237** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5238user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5239
5240Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5241user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5242all variables that have documentation.
5243
5244** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5245shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5246that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5247minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5248it should show; the default is 20.
5249
5250Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5251the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5252of your input.
5253
5254** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5255all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5256recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5257argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5258the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5259Newly added options are included as well.
5260
5261If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5262then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5263for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5264
5265This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5266Customize menu.
5267
5268** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5269the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5270
5271** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5272buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5273invoked.
5274
5275** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5276that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5277The default is 1.
5278
5279** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5280syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5281new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5282(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5283sensibly.
5284
5285** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5286
5287** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5288value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5289two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5290
5291** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5292reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5293for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5294every night.
5295
5296** Desktop changes
5297
5298*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5299the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5300
5301*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5302and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5303
5304** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5305read and post multi-lingual articles.
5306
5307** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5308doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5309be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5310outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5311the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5312made invisible again.
5313
5314** Mail reading and sending changes
5315
5316*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5317the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5318changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5319toggle.
5320
5321*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5322now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5323summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5324the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5325rmail-default-body-file.
5326
5327*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5328longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5329handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5330
5331*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5332it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5333is evaluated to insert the signature.
5334
5335*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5336outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5337handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5338putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5339transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5340especially interested in trying feedmail.
5341
5342feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5343feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5344provided by feedmail are:
5345
5346**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5347stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5348there is also a queue for draft messages
5349
5350**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5351be prompted for confirmation
5352
5353**** does smart filling of address headers
5354
5355**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5356the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5357can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5358
5359**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5360the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5361/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5362function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5363
5364** Dired changes
5365
5366*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5367files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5368
5369*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5370run Dired on the directory name at point.
5371
5372*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5373files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5374for a specified regexp.
5375
5376** VC Changes
5377
5378*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5379conveniently.
5380
5381*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5382faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5383Dired.
5384
5385VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5386directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5387listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5388currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5389
5390You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5391then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5392vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5393control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5394on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5395
5396All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5397is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5398`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5399the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5400`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5401
5402The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5403toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5404VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5405`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5406
5407Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5408ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5409command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5410
5411*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5412file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5413session to resolve them.
5414
5415Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5416resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5417contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5418uses as well).
5419
5420*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5421command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5422you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5423either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5424branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5425If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5426using ediff.
5427
5428** Changes in Font Lock
5429
5430*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5431are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5432use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5433unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5434compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5435
5436** Frame name display changes
5437
5438*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5439frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5440raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5441when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5442
5443*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5444frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5445menu.
5446
5447** Comint (subshell) changes
5448
5449*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5450subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5451with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5452
5453*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5454
5455C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5456that is, the line after the last line you got.
5457You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5458
5459C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5460send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5461the following line.
5462
5463C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5464which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5465previously sent input.
5466
5467C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5468it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5469as the search string.
5470
5471*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5472automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5473
5474** C mode changes
5475
5476*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5477and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5478assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5479definition.
5480
5481*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5482(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5483Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5484style is still the default however.
5485
5486*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5487
5488*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5489are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5490them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5491
5492*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5493and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5494
5495*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5496namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5497
5498*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5499makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5500
5501*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5502c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5503
5504*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5505should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5506package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5507variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5508
5509** Changes to hippie-expand.
5510
5511*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5512non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5513which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5514
5515*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5516non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5517expanding dynamically.
5518
5519*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5520non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5521
5522*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5523non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5524this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5525expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5526
5527*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5528
5529** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5530
5531*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5532bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5533automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5534bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5535against the first word in the title.
5536
5537*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5538capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5539bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5540lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5541lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5542bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5543
5544*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5545generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5546replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5547bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5548
5549** Changes in vcursor.el.
5550
5551*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5552and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5553variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5554entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5555`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5556in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5557
5558*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5559Editing group once the package is loaded.
5560
5561*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5562generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5563vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5564
5565*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5566vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5567
5568** Ispell changes.
5569
5570*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5571buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5572are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5573
5574*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5575A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5576and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5577defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5578include:
5579
5580 o URLs are automatically skipped
5581 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5582
5583*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5584
5585** Changes to RefTeX mode
5586
5587RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5588large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5589re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5590section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5591
5592*** New recursive parser.
5593
5594The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5595entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5596recursive parser scans the individual files.
5597
5598*** Parsing only part of a document.
5599
5600Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5601partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5602the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5603
5604 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5605
5606*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5607
5608This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5609
5610 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5611
5612*** Using multiple selection buffers
5613
5614If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5615for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5616
5617 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5618
5619*** References to external documents.
5620
5621The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5622documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5623documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5624macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5625RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5626the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5627The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5628
5629*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5630
5631The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5632and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5633
5634Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5635the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5636
5637*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5638
5639The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5640buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5641
5642*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5643
5644The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5645contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5646`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5647have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5648enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5649at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5650more.
5651
5652*** Support for the varioref package
5653
5654The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5655
5656*** New hooks
5657
5658Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5659and citations are created. These hooks are
5660`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5661`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5662
5663*** Citations outside LaTeX
5664
5665The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5666a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5667
5668*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5669
5670The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5671fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5672fontified, use
5673
5674 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5675
5676** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5677With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5678the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5679directories that contain the same file name.
5680
5681Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5682Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5683file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5684Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5685have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5686names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5687directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5688directory.
5689
5690** New modes and packages
5691
5692*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5693It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5694it, but some do not.
5695
5696*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5697code.
5698
5699*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5700current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5701around in a buffer.
5702
5703Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5704
5705*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5706uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5707be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5708established system of notation similar to Chess.
5709
5710*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5711documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5712guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5713
5714*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5715available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5716system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5717simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5718functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5719the like.
5720
5721*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5722identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5723
5724*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5725within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5726used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5727the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5728
5729*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5730
5731 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5732 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5733 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5734 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5735 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5736 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5737 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5738 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5739 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5740 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5741 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5742
5743 Platform-specific modes:
5744
5745 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5746 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5747 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5748 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5749 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5750 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5751 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5752 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5753 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5754\f
5755* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5756
5757** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5758use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5759That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5760Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5761
5762Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5763you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5764consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5765
5766** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5767and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5768specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5769searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5770
5771** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5772multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5773character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5774environment.
5775
5776** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5777take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5778string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5779current input method for reading this one event.
5780
5781** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5782now control whether to output certain characters as
5783backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5784non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5785characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5786in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5787\f
5788* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5789
5790** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5791of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5792
5793** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5794in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5795always increases point by 1.
5796
5797The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5798considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5799
5800See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5801
5802** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5803Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5804default value changed. For example,
5805
5806 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5807 :type 'integer
5808 :group 'foo
5809 :version "20.3")
5810
5811 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5812 :version "20.3")
5813
5814If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5815default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5816is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5817`:version' in the top level group.
5818
5819This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5820
5821** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5822starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5823
5824However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5825symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5826support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5827to themselves.
5828
5829If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5830this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5831values whatever.
5832
5833** There is a new debugger command, R.
5834It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5835in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5836
5837** Frame-local variables.
5838
5839You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5840the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5841local bindings for that variable.
5842
5843These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5844frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5845modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5846parameter name.
5847
5848Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5849Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5850active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5851that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5852
5853It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5854clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5855very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5856through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5857
5858** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5859"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5860evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5861makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5862See the documentation in sregex.el.
5863
5864** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5865is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5866parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5867The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5868
5869** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5870If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5871
5872** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5873known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5874define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5875
5876** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5877when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5878it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5879history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5880
5881The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5882return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5883empty input.
5884
5885** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5886for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5887`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5888Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5889`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5890
5891** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5892echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5893a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5894default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5895
5896** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5897specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5898function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5899place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5900non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5901
5902** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5903If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5904up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5905end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5906
5907** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5908which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5909If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5910
5911** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5912holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5913was directed to display this buffer.
5914
5915** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5916with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5917describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5918other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5919set-window-configuration.
5920
5921** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5922window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5923positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5924windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5925
5926** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5927override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5928look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5929
5930If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5931non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5932map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5933
5934minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5935and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5936
5937** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5938except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5939
5940** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5941USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5942floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5943
5944** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5945to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5946in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5947it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5948
5949** Menu changes
5950
5951*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5952keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5953better supported.
5954
5955The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5956a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5957you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5958can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5959then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5960
5961*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5962
5963In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5964 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5965defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5966starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5967
5968The format is:
5969 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5970 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5971where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5972string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5973The supported properties include
5974
5975:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5976 item is enabled.
5977:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5978 item should appear in the menu.
5979:filter FILTER-FN
5980 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5981 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5982 It should return a binding to use instead.
5983:keys DESCRIPTION
5984 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5985 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5986 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5987:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5988 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5989 keyboard binding.
5990:key-sequence nil
5991 This means that the command normally has no
5992 keyboard equivalent.
5993:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5994:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5995 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5996 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5997 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5998
5999Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6000Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6001
6002(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6003
6004** New event types
6005
6006*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6007mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6008corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6009which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6010
6011 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6012
6013where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6014same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6015indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6016negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6017the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6018forward, away from the user.
6019
6020As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6021
6022*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6023files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6024and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6025filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6026loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6027
6028 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6029
6030where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6031same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6032that were dragged and dropped.
6033
6034As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6035
6036** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6037
6038*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6039any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6040to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6041
6042*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6043can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6044that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6045
6046*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6047in Emacs 19 and before.
6048
6049The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6050The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6051
6052*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6053buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6054unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6055representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6056
6057This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6058as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6059viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6060one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6061will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6062
6063This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6064representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6065(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6066consistent with the new representation.
6067
6068*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6069representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6070about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6071however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6072
6073The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6074nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6075using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6076
6077*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6078representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6079representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6080
6081The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6082loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6083is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6084
6085*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6086which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6087
6088*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6089which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6090
6091*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6092portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6093so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6094You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6095
6096*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6097it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6098
6099*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6100convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6101buffer or string being searched.
6102
6103One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6104[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6105searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6106searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6107obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6108you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6109expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6110
6111*** Structure of coding system changed.
6112
6113All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6114by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6115which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6116as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6117vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6118your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6119define-coding-system-alias.
6120
6121The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6122the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6123access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6124pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6125character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6126safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6127'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6128`iso-8859-1'.
6129
6130Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6131The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6132coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6133(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6134
6135Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6136also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6137are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6138the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6139
6140*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6141proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6142This function requires a user interaction.
6143
6144*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6145find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6146select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6147systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6148a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6149select-safe-coding-system.
6150
6151*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6152decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6153last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6154was done.
6155
6156*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6157used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6158coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6159
6160*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6161return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6162characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6163`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6164
6165*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6166coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6167coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6168converted.
6169
6170*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6171coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6172
6173*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6174character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6175character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6176each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6177either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6178range of characters.
6179
6180*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6181Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6182
6183*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6184in the current buffer at position POS.
6185
6186*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6187input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6188function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6189character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6190event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6191binding input-method-function to nil.
6192
6193The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6194method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6195input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6196the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6197not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6198
6199The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6200subsequent events of a key sequence.
6201
6202*** You can customize any language environment by using
6203set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6204
6205The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6206customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6207instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6208environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6209exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6210\f
6211* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6212
6213** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6214options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6215at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6216tree structure.
6217
6218M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6219user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6220
6221With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6222session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6223in your .emacs file.)
6224
6225** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6226You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6227
6228** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6229This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6230
6231** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6232immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6233kills the region.
6234
6235The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6236delete the character before point, as usual.
6237
6238** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6239on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6240by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6241
6242** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6243insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6244the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6245onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6246history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6247past.)
6248
6249** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6250This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6251in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6252TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6253makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6254
6255As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6256and is an alias for it.
6257
6258If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6259use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6260
6261** Scrolling changes
6262
6263*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6264position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6265
6266In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6267on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6268where it started.
6269
6270*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6271move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6272screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6273does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6274
6275*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6276top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6277comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6278recenters the window.
6279
6280** International character set support (MULE)
6281
6282Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6283including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6284Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6285Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6286features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6287MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6288
6289Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6290coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6291character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6292variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6293into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6294
6295Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6296generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6297supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6298language, to make it possible to type them.
6299
6300The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6301character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6302
6303The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6304to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6305
6306You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6307
6308 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6309
6310Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6311characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6312argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6313already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6314characters for their work until they want to change.
6315
6316*** Input methods
6317
6318An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6319specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6320has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6321the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6322support several input methods.
6323
6324The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6325another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6326work.
6327
6328A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6329characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6330composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6331consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6332sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6333letter.
6334
6335The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6336by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6337First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6338marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6339mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6340
6341None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6342they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6343phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6344converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6345
6346Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6347word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6348typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6349the first guess is wrong.
6350
6351*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6352turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6353
6354If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6355byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6356they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6357the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6358
6359However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6360use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6361includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6362translate automatically to and from either one.
6363
6364*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6365
6366Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6367file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6368sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6369what you want.
6370
6371If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6372example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6373system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6374multibyte characters in that buffer.
6375
6376If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6377character conversion as well.
6378
6379*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6380
6381A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6382Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6383requires using many fonts.
6384
6385Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6386collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6387
6388A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6389the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6390have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6391you would use a font.
6392
6393If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6394specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6395display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6396
6397The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6398(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6399characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6400or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6401and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6402
6403*** Defining fontsets.
6404
6405Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6406chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6407with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6408
6409Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6410of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6411`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6412standard fontset are created automatically.
6413
6414If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6415argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6416FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6417with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6418name is `fontset-startup'.
6419
6420Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6421The resource value should have this form:
6422 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6423FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6424 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6425 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6426 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6427The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6428of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6429CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6430FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6431
6432Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6433last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6434You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6435
6436For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6437font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6438following resource,
6439 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6440the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6441 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6442Here is the substitution rule:
6443 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6444 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6445 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6446 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6447 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6448
6449The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6450fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6451that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6452
6453With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6454like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6455name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6456fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6457fontsets.
6458
6459*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6460defaults for a particular choice of language.
6461
6462Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6463method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6464visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6465already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6466language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6467system for new files that you create.
6468
6469It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6470set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6471whole Emacs session.
6472
6473For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6474chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6475with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6476
6477*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6478specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6479specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6480the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6481coding systems that Emacs supports.
6482
6483*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6484lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6485This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6486After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6487is used for *the immediately following command*.
6488
6489So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6490write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6491
6492If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6493then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6494
6495For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6496visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6497
6498*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6499construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6500to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6501specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6502of the file.
6503
6504*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6505the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6506code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6507translated into that character code.
6508
6509This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6510various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6511
6512By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6513
6514*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6515the coding system for keyboard input.
6516
6517Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6518with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6519some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6520
6521By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6522
6523Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6524input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6525translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6526to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6527designed to work with terminals.
6528
6529*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6530specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6531This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6532has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6533translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6534in the corresponding buffer.
6535
6536By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6537
6538*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6539to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6540It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6541
6542*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6543an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6544command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6545want to use.
6546
6547C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6548method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6549
6550*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6551layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6552remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6553which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6554
6555*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6556the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6557related information.
6558
6559*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6560HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6561scripts.
6562
6563*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6564information about the support for a particular language.
6565You specify the language as an argument.
6566
6567*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6568the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6569first dash.
6570
6571A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6572(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6573whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
65741 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6575
6576 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6577 B big5 (Chinese)
6578 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6579 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6580 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6581 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6582 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6583 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6584 K euc-korea (Korean)
6585 R koi8 (Russian)
6586 Q tibetan
6587 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6588 T lao
6589 T tis620 (Thai)
6590 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6591 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6592 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6593 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6594 z hz (Chinese)
6595
6596When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6597two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6598coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6599keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6600
6601*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6602conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6603
6604When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6605into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6606rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6607Rmail files themselves.
6608
6609*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6610conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6611
6612Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6613for sending mail:
6614
6615- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6616- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6617- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6618 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6619- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6620
6621*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6622to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6623Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6624translations.
6625
6626** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6627of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6628insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6629without any conversion.
6630
6631** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6632You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6633RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6634any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6635
6636** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6637functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6638
6639Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6640Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6641
6642Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6643mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6644
6645** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6646complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6647in the buffer before point.
6648
6649With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6650symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6651you are using.
6652
6653With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6654just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6655
6656** File locking works with NFS now.
6657
6658The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6659in the same directory as FILENAME.
6660
6661This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6662works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6663can become a bottleneck.
6664
6665The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6666does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6667create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6668file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6669rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6670so useful that the change is worth while.
6671
6672When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6673are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6674collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6675tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6676
6677** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6678it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6679show-paren-mode.
6680
6681** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6682selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6683delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6684
6685** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6686within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6687complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6688
6689** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6690it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6691set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6692
6693** Changes in View mode.
6694
6695*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6696Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6697
6698*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6699view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6700
6701*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6702previous state.
6703
6704*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6705scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6706
6707*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6708non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6709not just the selected window.
6710
6711*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6712read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6713turns View mode on or off.
6714
6715*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6716how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6717delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6718
6719** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6720now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6721
6722** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6723has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6724presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6725which version to compare with.
6726
6727** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6728blocks if a match is inside the block.
6729
6730The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6731is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6732isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6733shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6734
6735By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6736of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6737blocks, all of them or none.
6738
6739** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6740current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6741confirmation first.
6742
6743** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6744now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6745However, the mode will not be changed if
6746(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6747(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6748 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6749(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6750
6751This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6752
6753However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6754these commands do not change the major mode.
6755
6756** M-x occur changes.
6757
6758*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6759it performs a case-sensitive search.
6760
6761*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6762if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6763using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6764
6765** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6766in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6767window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6768that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6769buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6770
6771** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6772after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6773appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6774come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6775
6776** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6777selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6778buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6779
6780** Outline mode changes.
6781
6782*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6783
6784*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6785
6786** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6787you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6788Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6789was already active.
6790
6791The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6792unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6793get confused by it.
6794
6795If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6796set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6797
6798** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6799
6800*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6801conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6802character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6803including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6804
6805The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6806mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6807copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6808
6809*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6810are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6811values.
6812
6813`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6814case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6815`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6816case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6817
6818** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6819certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6820can be. The default value is 30.
6821
6822** Changes in Mail mode.
6823
6824*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6825Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6826composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6827`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6828`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6829behavior.
6830
6831C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6832compose-mail-other-frame.
6833
6834*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6835the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6836replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6837buffer that shows the original message.
6838
6839*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6840with separator lines around the contents.
6841
6842*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6843in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6844definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6845need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6846
6847*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6848
6849**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6850for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6851controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6852Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6853
6854**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6855to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6856/etc/passwd.
6857
6858**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6859to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6860/etc/passwd.
6861
6862** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6863special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6864directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6865reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6866
6867Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6868when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6869be taken to be magic.
6870
6871** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6872files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6873available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6874
6875M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6876(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6877
6878** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6879suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6880
6881In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6882
6883new key dired.el binding old key
6884------- ---------------- -------
6885 * c dired-change-marks c
6886 * m dired-mark m
6887 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6888 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6889 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6890 * u dired-unmark u
6891 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6892 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6893 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6894 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6895 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6896 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6897
6898** Rmail changes.
6899
6900*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6901saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6902chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6903each time you run it.
6904
6905*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6906whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6907
6908*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6909messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6910means to move in the opposite direction.
6911
6912*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6913you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6914
6915*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6916just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6917It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6918can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6919for output.
6920
6921** Gnus changes.
6922
6923*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6924
6925*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6926Gnus.
6927
6928*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6929`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6930
6931*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6932article mode line.
6933
6934*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6935
6936*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6937
6938(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6939
6940*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6941are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6942`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6943
6944*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6945
6946*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6947
6948*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6949See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6950
6951*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6952Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6953used to pick articles.
6954
6955*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6956another have been added.
6957
6958 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6959
6960*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6961generating lines in buffers.
6962
6963*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6964`M-C-_'.
6965
6966*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6967
6968*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6969
6970 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6971
6972*** Scores can be decayed.
6973
6974 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6975
6976*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6977Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6978
6979*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6980the native server.
6981
6982 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6983
6984*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6985(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6986
6987*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6988
6989*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6990even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6991
6992*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6993(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6994
6995 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6996 a group.
6997
6998*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6999sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7000
7001 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7002
7003*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7004
7005 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7006
7007*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7008
7009 Use the `Y c' command.
7010
7011*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7012
7013*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7014
7015 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7016
7017*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7018from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7019
7020 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7021
7022*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7023
7024*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7025the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7026
7027 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7028
7029Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7030and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7031from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7032hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7033this issue.)
7034
7035Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7036automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7037particular news group. This can be done by:
7038
7039 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7040
7041Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7042of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7043"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7044system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7045for reading and posting).
7046
7047CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7048 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7049Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7050newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7051there.
7052
7053Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7054default. Here are some of these default settings:
7055
7056 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7057 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7058 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7059 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7060 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7061
7062When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7063the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7064
7065** CC mode changes.
7066
7067*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7068code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7069values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7070this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7071Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7072loaded.
7073
7074If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7075Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7076style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7077share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7078c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7079must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7080
7081*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7082of the current buffer.
7083
7084*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7085it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7086of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7087
7088*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7089style that the Python developers like.
7090
7091*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7092This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7093just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7094
7095** VC Changes [new]
7096
7097** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7098name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7099directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7100
7101This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7102master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7103developers.
7104
7105You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7106RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7107
7108*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7109other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7110writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7111calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7112
7113*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7114version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7115
7116** Calendar changes.
7117
7118A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7119of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7120for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7121
7122** ps-print changes
7123
7124There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7125
7126*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7127
7128The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7129formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7130`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7131`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7132It defaults to `letter'.
7133If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7134
7135The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7136of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7137non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7138
7139The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7140It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7141It defaults to 1.
7142
7143*** Horizontal layout
7144
7145The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7146`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7147All are measured in points.
7148
7149*** Vertical layout
7150
7151The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7152`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7153All are measured in points.
7154
7155*** Headers
7156
7157If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7158`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7159margin above the text.
7160
7161If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7162framing box is printed around the header.
7163
7164The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7165`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7166
7167The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7168`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7169`ps-header-font-size'.
7170
7171*** Font managing
7172
7173The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7174used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7175`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7176elements to this alist.
7177
7178The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7179for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7180
7181** hideshow changes.
7182
7183*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7184C++, ; for lisp).
7185
7186*** Support for java-mode added.
7187
7188*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7189in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7190
7191*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7192the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7193way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7194
7195*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7196robust and a lot faster.
7197
7198*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7199
7200*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7201to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7202documentation for more details.
7203
7204** Changes in Enriched mode.
7205
7206*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7207filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7208of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7209use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7210the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7211
7212*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7213distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7214as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7215as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7216
7217** Font Lock mode
7218
7219*** Custom support
7220
7221The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7222font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7223faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7224group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7225your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7226consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7227
7228You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7229
7230*** Maximum decoration
7231
7232Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7233default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7234of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7235supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7236to get the old behavior.
7237
7238*** New support
7239
7240Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7241
7242Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7243support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7244
7245*** Configurable support
7246
7247Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7248additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7249c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7250java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7251list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7252of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7253convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7254
7255Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7256way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7257it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7258
7259*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7260
7261You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7262highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7263for any mode.
7264
7265For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7266
7267 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7268
7269in your ~/.emacs.
7270
7271*** New faces
7272
7273Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7274font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7275distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7276to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7277
7278*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7279
7280The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7281cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7282same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7283
7284*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7285
7286The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7287according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7288the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7289non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7290refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7291the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7292Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7293
7294This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7295For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7296this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7297refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7298containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7299the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7300
7301As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7302
7303Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7304Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7305Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7306new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7307
7308If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7309settings.
7310
7311** Ada mode changes.
7312
7313*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7314If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7315procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7316you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7317stubs.
7318
7319*** There are two new commands:
7320 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7321 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7322
7323The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7324`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7325`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7326
7327*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7328is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7329Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7330
7331*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7332formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7333places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7334space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7335
7336** Scheme mode changes.
7337
7338*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7339mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7340for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7341with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7342have any effect.
7343
7344If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7345still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7346scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7347variables as buffer-local variables.
7348
7349*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7350Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7351
7352** Changes to the emacsclient program
7353
7354*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7355USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7356associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7357can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7358
7359*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7360it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7361buffer in Emacs.
7362
7363*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7364use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7365ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7366option takes precedence.
7367
7368** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7369constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7370(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7371
7372** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7373which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7374the current defun.
7375
7376** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7377following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7378
7379** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7380and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7381necessary).
7382
7383** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7384if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7385these register values no longer become completely useless.
7386If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7387asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7388it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7389
7390** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7391example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7392be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7393you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7394
7395You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7396variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7397file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7398revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7399only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7400
7401** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7402since it applies only to the current frame.
7403
7404** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7405file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7406and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7407
7408This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7409multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7410variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7411tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7412instead of just the file you are editing.
7413
7414** RefTeX mode
7415
7416RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7417and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7418different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7419multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7420turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7421
7422C-c ( reftex-label
7423 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7424 knows which kind of label is needed.
7425
7426C-c ) reftex-reference
7427 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7428 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7429
7430C-c [ reftex-citation
7431 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7432 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7433
7434C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7435 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7436
7437C-c = reftex-toc
7438 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7439 can quickly jump to every section.
7440
7441Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7442commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7443Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7444reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7445C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7446
7447** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7448
7449*** Info documentation is now available.
7450
7451*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7452both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7453
7454*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7455bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7456
7457*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7458(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7459
7460*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7461entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7462appropriate functions.
7463
7464*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7465entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7466
7467*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7468been cleaned.
7469
7470*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7471bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7472
7473*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7474shall be delimited.
7475
7476*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7477bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7478bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7479
7480*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7481field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7482prefixed with `ALT'.
7483
7484*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7485bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7486formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7487documentation).
7488
7489*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7490documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7491for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7492
7493*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7494comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7495
7496*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7497alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7498signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7499
7500*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7501
7502*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7503
7504*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7505from alien sources.
7506
7507*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7508to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7509crossref entries.
7510
7511*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7512region.
7513
7514*** Added support for imenu.
7515
7516*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7517of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7518`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7519`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7520
7521*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7522from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7523
7524** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7525
7526** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7527
7528** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7529functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7530Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7531as an argument.
7532
7533When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7534and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7535
7536** browse-url changes
7537
7538*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7539Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7540(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7541non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7542customization variables.
7543
7544*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7545
7546*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7547lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7548(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7549
7550** Changes in Ediff
7551
7552*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7553pops up the Info file for this command.
7554
7555*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7556the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7557merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7558directories).
7559
7560*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7561and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7562files in the same directory.
7563
7564*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7565The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7566related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7567
7568** Changes in Viper
7569
7570*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7571*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7572 instead of vip-.
7573*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7574*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7575Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7576*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7577*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7578*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7579color when Viper is in insert state.
7580*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7581Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7582viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7583
7584** Etags changes.
7585
7586*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7587default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7588Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7589variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7590not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7591
7592*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7593
7594*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7595constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7596
7597*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7598recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7599In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7600
7601*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7602C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7603recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7604methods and protocols.
7605
7606*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7607.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7608column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7609paragraph name.
7610
7611*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7612an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7613at least M times and as many as N times.
7614
7615** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7616in files has changed slightly.
7617
7618With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7619time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7620This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7621with old time-stamp-format values.
7622
7623In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7624(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7625This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7626reasons.
7627
7628In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7629natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7630fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7631(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7632time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7633specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7634
7635Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7636case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7637truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7638
7639The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7640being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7641future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7642recommended now will continue to work then.
7643
7644See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7645details.
7646
7647** There are some additional major modes:
7648
7649dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7650m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7651meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7652
7653** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7654copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7655into Emacs.
7656
7657** New Lisp packages include:
7658
7659*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7660
7661*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7662be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7663
7664*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7665
7666*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7667in shell buffers.
7668
7669*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7670See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7671and `elint-defun'.
7672
7673*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7674meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7675ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7676strings or comments.
7677
7678These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7679abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7680you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7681insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7682at these points.
7683
7684*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7685can visit them by short forms of their names.
7686
7687*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7688Emacs Lisp function at point.
7689
7690*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7691
7692*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7693switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7694
7695*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7696
7697*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7698
7699*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7700
7701*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7702from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7703
7704*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7705You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7706inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7707original place after inserting the copy.
7708
7709*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7710on the buffer.
7711
7712You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7713velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7714(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7715
7716Enable mouse-drag with:
7717 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7718-or-
7719 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7720
7721*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7722mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7723
7724*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7725It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7726
7727*** ogonek
7728
7729The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7730Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7731platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7732TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7733ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7734prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7735instance) and vice versa.
7736
7737To use this package load it using
7738 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7739Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7740 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7741 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7742The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7743ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7744
7745*** Interface to ph.
7746
7747Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7748
7749The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7750services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7751these servers.
7752
7753*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7754
7755*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7756You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7757while the real cursor does not move.
7758
7759*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7760for visiting your favorite web sites.
7761
7762*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7763so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7764
7765** movemail change
7766
7767Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7768mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7769supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7770user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7771
7772This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7773\f
7774* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7775
7776** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7777
7778Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7779end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7780Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7781file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7782file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7783
7784To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7785C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7786coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7787specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7788LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7789save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7790\f
7791* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7792
7793** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7794Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7795vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7796Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7797
7798** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7799to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7800
7801In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7802don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7803"win".
7804
7805** Basic Lisp changes
7806
7807*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7808evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7809
7810*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7811be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7812or by the user.
7813
7814The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7815
7816*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7817
7818(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7819(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7820
7821*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7822usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7823its argument.
7824
7825*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7826
7827*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7828
7829*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7830
7831*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7832error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7833include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7834`format' function.
7835
7836*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7837or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7838whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7839
7840*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7841either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7842adding one of these suffixes.
7843
7844*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7845which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7846If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7847
7848We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7849because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7850
7851*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7852
7853*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7854You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7855
7856*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7857conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7858
7859 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7860
7861BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7862BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7863
7864*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7865choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7866restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7867works using `save-current-buffer'.
7868
7869*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7870write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7871of the last form.
7872
7873*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7874which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7875last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7876as the last form.
7877
7878*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7879characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7880matches.
7881
7882For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7883
7884*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7885with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7886Then it returns that string.
7887
7888For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7889
7890(with-output-to-string
7891 (princ "The buffer is ")
7892 (princ (buffer-name)))
7893
7894returns "The buffer is foo".
7895
7896** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7897is non-nil.
7898
7899These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7900buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7901characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7902
7903*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7904a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7905
7906Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7907character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7908Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7909position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7910characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7911 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7912
7913ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7914Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7915non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7916characters".
7917
7918The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7919through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7920"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7921range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7922leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7923
7924*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7925(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7926multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7927character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7928
7929This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7930always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7931
7932However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7933
7934*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7935because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7936have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7937the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7938guaranteed.
7939
7940*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7941between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7942character).
7943
7944When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7945
7946 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7947 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7948 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7949 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7950 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7951
7952*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7953
7954*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7955`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7956more than the number of characters.
7957
7958You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7959it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7960\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7961is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7962follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7963newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7964
7965*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7966and returns a string containing those characters.
7967
7968*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7969(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7970counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7971character, sref signals an error.
7972
7973*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7974in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7975string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7976
7977*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7978in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7979region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7980
7981*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7982the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7983to a vector of the characters in it.
7984
7985*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7986of a string. You call it as follows:
7987
7988 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7989
7990This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7991STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7992This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7993Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7994it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7995
7996*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7997if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7998
7999*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8000if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8001
8002*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8003to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8004not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8005which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8006
8007(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8008
8009This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8010
8011The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8012If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8013are not included in the resulting value.
8014
8015The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8016at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8017WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8018is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8019
8020If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8021place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8022character extends across that column), then the padding character
8023PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8024string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8025column START-COLUMN.
8026
8027*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8028the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8029necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8030difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8031changed text, before the change.
8032
8033*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8034sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8035one character set for each script, not for each language.
8036
8037**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8038
8039**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8040
8041**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8042set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8043
8044**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8045name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8046which identify the character within that character set.
8047
8048**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8049byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8050opposite of split-char.
8051
8052**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8053of all the characters between BEG and END.
8054
8055**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8056of all the characters in a string.
8057
8058*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8059and specifying coding systems.
8060
8061**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8062system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8063of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8064(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8065and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8066as what to do about code conversion.)
8067
8068**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8069name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8070
8071**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8072for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8073except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8074
8075Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8076which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8077to match against a file name.
8078
8079VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8080a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8081decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8082to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8083systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8084specifies the coding system for encoding.
8085
8086If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8087or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8088
8089**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8090the coding system to use for network sockets.
8091
8092Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8093which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8094either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8095service names.
8096
8097VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8098a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8099decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8100to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8101systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8102specifies the coding system for encoding.
8103
8104If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8105or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8106
8107**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8108for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8109except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8110start the subprocess.
8111
8112**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8113systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8114when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8115(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8116to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8117
8118**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8119coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8120subprocess.
8121
8122It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8123but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8124start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8125connection permanently or until overridden.
8126
8127The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8128file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8129network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8130coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8131It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8132system for one operation at a time.
8133
8134**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8135files, subprocesses or network connections.
8136
8137**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8138coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8139The value is a cons cell,
8140 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8141where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8142the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8143input to the subprocess.
8144
8145**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8146change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8147
8148** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8149customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8150you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8151
8152You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8153variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8154information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8155legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8156customization.
8157
8158Thus, instead of writing
8159
8160 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8161 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8162
8163you would now write this:
8164
8165 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8166 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8167 :type 'boolean
8168 :group foo)
8169
8170The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8171two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8172describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8173for a description of them.
8174
8175The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8176should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8177
8178 (defgroup ispell nil
8179 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8180 :group 'processes)
8181
8182The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8183group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8184but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8185to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8186second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8187
8188Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8189package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8190have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8191package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8192first-level subgroups.
8193
8194** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8195
8196This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8197separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8198
8199** easy-mmode
8200
8201The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8202developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8203only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8204predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8205`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8206`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8207
8208** Text property changes
8209
8210*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8211text property.
8212
8213*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8214previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8215place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8216functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8217starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8218
8219If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8220LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8221of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8222position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8223
8224*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8225value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8226is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8227
8228** Changes in invisibility features
8229
8230*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8231hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8232is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8233should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8234would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8235make the overlay visible.
8236
8237During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8238invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8239needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8240which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8241the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8242t when it should hide it.
8243
8244*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8245
8246Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8247invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8248and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8249Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8250manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8251Here is an example of how to do this:
8252
8253 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8254 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8255 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8256 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8257
8258 ...
8259 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8260
8261 ...
8262 ;; When done with the overlays:
8263 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8264 ;; Or respectively:
8265 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8266
8267** Changes in syntax parsing.
8268
8269*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8270`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8271obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8272`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8273
8274If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8275is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8276used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8277
8278When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8279character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8280
8281 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8282 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8283
8284 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8285 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8286 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8287
8288 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8289 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8290 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8291 determine the syntax type of the character.
8292
8293 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8294 of the current buffer.
8295
8296*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8297value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8298for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8299
8300*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8301and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8302only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8303character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8304another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8305
8306These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8307text property.
8308
8309*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8310arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8311of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8312
8313*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8314(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8315element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8316nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8317string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8318
8319*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8320syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8321`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8322
8323** Changes in face features
8324
8325*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8326if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8327
8328*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8329of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8330
8331*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8332set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8333
8334*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8335set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8336
8337*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8338by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8339and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8340the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8341overlay property).
8342
8343This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8344arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8345
8346** Changes in file-handling functions
8347
8348*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8349directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8350they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8351is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8352
8353This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8354begins with ~.
8355
8356*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8357it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8358
8359*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8360the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8361
8362*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8363as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8364
8365*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8366character code conversion as well as other things.
8367
8368Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8369(formerly it did not).
8370
8371*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8372environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8373
8374*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8375instead of constant strings.
8376
8377*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8378to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8379any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8380
8381substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8382in the same way as before.
8383
8384*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8385The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8386which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8387
8388*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8389error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8390else, and returns nil.
8391
8392*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8393directory cannot be listed.
8394
8395** Changes in minibuffer input
8396
8397*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8398read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8399additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8400argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8401ways:
8402
8403 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8404 It is available through the history command M-n.
8405
8406*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8407read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8408argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8409minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8410enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8411
8412In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8413argument in this way.
8414
8415*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8416from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8417minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8418
8419** Echo area features
8420
8421*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8422echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8423minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8424after the echo area is cleared.
8425
8426*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8427in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8428
8429** Keyboard input features
8430
8431*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8432set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8433
8434*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8435received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8436by keyboard macros.
8437
8438** Frame-related changes
8439
8440*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8441creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8442hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8443
8444*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8445the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8446has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8447
8448*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8449selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8450value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8451in the selected frame.
8452
8453*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8454is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8455which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8456
8457** X Windows features
8458
8459*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8460x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8461x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8462
8463*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8464The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8465
8466*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8467MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8468A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8469
8470If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8471it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8472
8473** Subprocess features
8474
8475*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8476functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8477automatically.
8478
8479*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8480and returns the output from the command as a string.
8481
8482*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8483and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8484
8485** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8486does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8487
8488** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8489at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8490goes after the other menu items.
8491
8492** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8493of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8494around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8495are in use.
8496
8497The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8498series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8499
8500Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8501after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8502form.
8503
8504** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8505is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8506but its hook is still run.
8507
8508** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8509for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8510
8511If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8512regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8513useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8514
8515This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8516are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8517filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8518warned.
8519
8520** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8521way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8522
8523** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8524integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8525functions like display-time.
8526
8527** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8528name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8529
8530** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8531can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8532is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8533
8534** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8535if there is an error in compilation.
8536
8537** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8538switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8539argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8540they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8541
8542** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8543Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8544the *scratch* buffer.
8545
8546** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8547The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8548where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8549e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8550
8551** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8552and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8553It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8554
8555** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8556using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8557variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8558and compose-mail-other-frame.
8559
8560** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8561can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8562full name of the specified user will be returned.
8563
8564** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8565of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8566where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8567in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8568option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8569files at all.
8570
8571** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8572and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8573width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8574the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8575
8576For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8577minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8578with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8579is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8580
8581** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8582
8583** imenu.el changes.
8584
8585You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8586item from menu created by imenu.
8587
8588An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8589#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8590select one of those items.
8591\f
8592* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8593\f
8594* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8595
8596** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8597mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8598
8599** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8600use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8601Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8602\f
8603* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8604
8605** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8606To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8607
8608** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8609conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8610matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8611expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8612word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8613all caps.
8614
8615** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8616at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8617
8618When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8619does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8620as in previous Emacs versions.
8621
8622** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8623non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8624time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8625frames.
8626
8627** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8628if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8629This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8630Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8631accident.
8632
8633** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8634keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8635It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8636line and then executing the macro.
8637
8638This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8639
8640** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8641(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8642characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8643characters.
8644
8645** Font Lock mode
8646
8647*** Font Lock support modes
8648
8649Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8650below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8651hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8652to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8653Font Lock mode is enabled.
8654
8655For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8656
8657 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8658
8659in your ~/.emacs.
8660
8661*** lazy-lock
8662
8663The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8664only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8665becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8666Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8667occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8668buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8669Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8670
8671To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8672
8673 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8674
8675To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8676
8677** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8678
8679*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8680paren and key.
8681
8682*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8683supported.
8684
8685** Gnus changes.
8686
8687Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8688commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8689significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8690previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8691
8692Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8693between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8694
8695*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8696variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8697obsolete.
8698
8699*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8700missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8701
8702 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8703
8704*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8705
8706 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8707
8708*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8709referred.
8710
8711*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8712
8713 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8714
8715*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8716
8717 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8718
8719*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8720buffers.
8721
8722 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8723
8724*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8725
8726 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8727
8728*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8729
8730 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8731
8732*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8733
8734 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8735
8736*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8737is possible.
8738
8739 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8740
8741*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8742groups of groups.
8743
8744*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8745
8746*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8747batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8748
8749*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8750
8751*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8752
8753*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8754
8755 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8756
8757*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8758expiration times.
8759
8760*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8761
8762*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8763process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8764
8765*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8766articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8767bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8768
8769*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8770articles with the `*' command.
8771
8772*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8773
8774*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8775
8776 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8777
8778*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8779
8780*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8781`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8782
8783*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8784buffer.
8785
8786*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8787
8788*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8789
8790*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8791
8792 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8793
8794*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8795
8796 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8797
8798*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8799
8800*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8801
8802*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8803
8804 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8805 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8806
8807*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8808refetching.
8809
8810 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8811
8812*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8813buffer to allow easier treatment.
8814
8815*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8816
8817*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8818
8819 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8820
8821*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8822articles.
8823
8824 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8825
8826*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8827
8828*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8829cited text to hide is now customizable.
8830
8831 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8832
8833*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8834
8835 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8836
8837*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8838
8839*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8840
8841The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8842in greater detail.
8843\f
8844* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8845
8846** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8847second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8848asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8849exists.
8850
8851** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8852as well as lists.
8853
8854** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8855of a given keymap.
8856
8857** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8858given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8859keymap or nil.
8860
8861** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8862an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8863name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8864menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8865equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8866alias.
8867\f
8868* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8869
8870** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8871
8872Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8873This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8874was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8875far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8876pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8877
8878For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8879you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8880`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8881
8882** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8883
8884The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8885do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8886It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8887much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8888chapter of the manual for details.
8889
8890However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8891customization variables take effect.
8892
8893** Marking with the mouse.
8894
8895When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8896highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8897using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8898
8899** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8900
8901*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8902
8903*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8904to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8905
8906*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8907in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8908you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8909application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8910applications, these problems are significant.
8911
8912If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8913likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8914However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8915will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8916other DOS application as a subprocess.
8917
8918Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8919You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8920
8921If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8922subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8923have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8924Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8925separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8926Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8927
8928** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8929
8930This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8931which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8932minibuffer contains.
8933
8934** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8935
8936The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8937It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8938It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8939affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8940
8941The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8942it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8943and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8944when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8945
8946** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8947enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8948
8949** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8950F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8951Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8952
8953If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8954menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8955something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8956the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8957
8958 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8959
8960** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8961to replace the characters it "deletes".
8962
8963** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8964
8965** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8966a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8967select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8968It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8969immediately after the selected one.
8970
8971This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8972made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8973
8974** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8975
8976Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8977directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8978If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8979Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8980recover-session.
8981
8982You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8983auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8984will not work.
8985
8986Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8987normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8988this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8989bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8990now that the bug is fixed.
8991
8992** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8993
8994There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8995when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8996Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8997which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8998
8999If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
9000telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
9001VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
9002the link is visited and a warning displayed.
9003
9004** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
9005Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
9006is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
9007
9008There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
9009Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
9010enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
9011The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
9012remain normal.
9013
9014** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
9015header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
9016
9017Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
9018known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
9019offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
9020Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
9021
9022Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
9023of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
9024a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
9025name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
9026documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
9027`mail-directory-stream'.)
9028
9029** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
9030skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
9031characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
9032with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
9033
9034Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
9035- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
9036wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
9037
9038The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
9039less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
9040headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
9041Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
9042Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
9043fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
9044to a limitation in font-lock).
9045
9046External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
9047
9048** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
9049buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9050buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9051this example:
9052
9053 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9054 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9055
9056** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9057
9058*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9059
9060*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9061
9062*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9063
9064*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9065entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9066will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9067isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9068(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9069The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9070
9071*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9072does the same job.
9073
9074*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9075"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9076
9077*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9078text.
9079
9080** Font Lock mode
9081
9082*** Global Font Lock mode
9083
9084Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9085new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9086font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9087turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9088on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9089
9090For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9091
9092 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9093
9094in your ~/.emacs.
9095
9096*** Local Refontification
9097
9098In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9099However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9100those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9101command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9102
9103In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9104(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9105current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9106above and below point.
9107
9108With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9109
9110** Follow mode
9111
9112Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9113buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9114side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9115they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9116split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9117follow-mode.
9118
9119M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9120
9121To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9122command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9123
9124** hide-show changes.
9125
9126The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9127to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9128normal hooks.
9129
9130** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9131The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9132
9133** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9134recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9135those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9136
9137** MSDOS Changes
9138
9139*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9140Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9141
9142*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9143and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9144
9145*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9146
9147*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9148pressing both mouse buttons.
9149
9150*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9151restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9152are:
9153
9154**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9155now works.
9156
9157**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9158
9159**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9160implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9161
9162**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9163
9164**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9165
9166**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9167
9168**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9169
9170**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9171\f
9172* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9173
9174** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9175tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9176remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9177this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9178behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9179
9180** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9181
9182The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9183not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9184need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9185be different.
9186
9187It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9188than `system-type'.
9189
9190See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9191
9192** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9193now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9194
9195** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9196that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9197
9198** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9199no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9200reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9201
9202The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9203to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9204like this:
9205
9206 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9207
9208SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9209It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9210becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9211
9212REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9213seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9214means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9215
9216*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9217up if too much time passes.
9218
9219 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9220
9221This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9222If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9223of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9224form in BODY.
9225
9226*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9227a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9228call looks like this:
9229
9230 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9231
9232SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9233runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9234timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9235ARGS.
9236
9237Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9238command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9239command.
9240
9241REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9242time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9243does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9244each time Emacs becomes idle.
9245
9246If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9247idle for SECS seconds.
9248
9249*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9250all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9251programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9252instead.
9253
9254*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9255there is no answer within a certain time.
9256
9257 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9258
9259asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9260within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9261Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9262
9263** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9264arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9265meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9266arguments in between are ignored.
9267
9268This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9269the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9270
9271** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9272/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9273/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9274site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9275version.
9276
9277It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9278version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9279for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9280has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9281and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9282problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9283
9284** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9285.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9286systems with limited file name syntax.
9287
9288Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9289convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9290for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9291completions.el:
9292
9293(defvar save-completions-file-name
9294 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9295 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9296
9297This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9298depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9299convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9300Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9301MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9302
9303** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9304rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9305minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9306
9307** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9308marker from its buffer position.
9309
9310** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9311Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9312The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9313
9314** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9315that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9316condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9317of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9318matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9319regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9320
9321This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9322errors that happen often during editing.
9323
9324** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9325into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9326puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9327
9328** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9329now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9330
9331** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9332a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9333name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9334to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9335and not get-buffer-window.
9336
9337** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9338calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9339being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9340
9341If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9342buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9343property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9344non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9345are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9346property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9347over and over for the same text.
9348
9349** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9350
9351*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9352in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9353
9354;; @(#) HEADER: text
9355;; $HEADER: text $
9356
9357in addition to the normal
9358
9359;; HEADER: text
9360
9361*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9362checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9363lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9364
9365
a933dad1 9366\f
3787e12e 9367* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9368
9369----------------------------------------------------------------------
9370Copyright information:
9371
424d8b44 9372Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9373
9374 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9375 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9376 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9377 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9378
9379 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9380 of this document, or of portions of it,
9381 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9382 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9383\f
9384Local variables:
9385mode: outline
9386paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9387end: